OptiX PTN 910 V100R003C02 Hardware Description 05 PDF

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN
Series
V100R003C02
Hardware Description
Issue 05
Date 2013-11-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series
Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX PTN 910 V100R003C02
Huawei iManager U2000 V100R006C02
Intended Audience
This document describes the equipment structure, chassis structure, and board classification.
This document also describes each board of these classes in details.
This document helps you get the detailed information about the equipment hardware.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers

l Hardware installation engineers
l System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows:
Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Symbol Description

avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.
Calls attention to important information, best practices and

tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows:
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.
Changes in Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C02

This document updates the following contents:
Others
Known defects are fixed.

Others
Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Others

Others

This document is the first release of the V100R003C02 version.
Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................1
2 Boards..............................................................................................................................................3
2.1 Overview of Boards........................................................................................................................................................6
2.2 CXPA/CXPB..................................................................................................................................................................9
2.2.1 Version Description.....................................................................................................................................................9
2.2.2 Functions and Features................................................................................................................................................9
2.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................12
2.2.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................15
2.2.5 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................22
2.2.6 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................22
2.2.7 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................22
2.3 CXPG/CXPH................................................................................................................................................................24
2.3.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................24
2.3.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................24
2.3.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................29
2.3.5 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................37
2.4 TNC2CXPN..................................................................................................................................................................40
2.4.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................44
2.4.5 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................50
2.5 TNC1CXPI...................................................................................................................................................................55
Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

2.5.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................59

2.5.5 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................65
2.6 TNC2CXPI...................................................................................................................................................................68
2.6.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................72
2.6.5 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................78
2.7 EF8T.............................................................................................................................................................................82
2.7.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................85
2.7.5 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................86
2.8 EF8F.............................................................................................................................................................................87
2.8.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................89
2.8.5 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................90
2.9 TND1EG2.....................................................................................................................................................................91
2.9.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................94
2.9.5 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................96
2.10 TND2EG2...................................................................................................................................................................98
2.10.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................99
2.10.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................99
2.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................100
2.10.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................101
Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

2.10.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................103

2.10.6 Board Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................................103
2.10.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................103
2.11 EG4F.........................................................................................................................................................................105
2.11.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................106
2.11.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................106
2.11.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................109
2.11.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................110
2.12 TND1ML1/TND1ML1A..........................................................................................................................................113
2.12.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................118
2.12.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................120
2.13 TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B.......................................................................................................................................121
2.13.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................126
2.13.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................128
2.14 TND1MD1A/TND1MD1B......................................................................................................................................129
2.14.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................133
2.14.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................136
2.15 CD1...........................................................................................................................................................................137
2.15.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................142
2.15.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................143
Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


2.16 ADS2A/ADS2B........................................................................................................................................................144
2.16.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................147
2.16.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................148
2.17 SHD4........................................................................................................................................................................149
2.17.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................152
2.17.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................153
2.18 SHD4I.......................................................................................................................................................................154
2.18.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................157
2.18.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................158
2.19 PIU............................................................................................................................................................................159
2.19.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................161
2.19.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................162
2.20 FAN..........................................................................................................................................................................162
2.20.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................164
2.20.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................165
3 Filler Panel..................................................................................................................................166
Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

3.1 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................................167

3.2 Appearance and Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................167
4 Pluggable Optical Modules.....................................................................................................168

4.1 Appearance and Application......................................................................................................................................169
4.2 Optical Module Labels...............................................................................................................................................169
5 Pluggable Electrical Module................................................................................................... 172

6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System.............................................................173
6.1 Structure and Functions..............................................................................................................................................174
6.2 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................................176
6.3 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................................180
7 ETP4830-4815AF External AC Power Supply System.........................................................182

7.1 Structure and Functions..............................................................................................................................................183
7.2 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................................185
7.3 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................................189
8 Fibers and Cables...................................................................................................................... 192

8.1 Fibers..........................................................................................................................................................................194
8.1.1 Fiber Types..............................................................................................................................................................194
8.1.2 Common Fiber Connectors......................................................................................................................................195
8.2 -48 V Power Supply Cable.........................................................................................................................................197
8.3 Power Cable for the EPS30-4815AF..........................................................................................................................198
8.4 Power Cable for the ETP4830-4815AF......................................................................................................................201
8.5 PGND Cables.............................................................................................................................................................204
8.6 Service Cables............................................................................................................................................................205
8.6.1 Ethernet Cables........................................................................................................................................................205
8.6.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables...........................................................................................................................................208
8.6.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................211
8.6.4 xDSL Cables............................................................................................................................................................214
8.7 Management Cables...................................................................................................................................................215
8.8 Clock Cables...............................................................................................................................................................217
8.8.1 External Clock Cables.............................................................................................................................................217
8.8.2 Clock Bridging Cable..............................................................................................................................................219
8.9 Alarm Input/Output Cables........................................................................................................................................221
A Safety Labels............................................................................................................................. 223

B Indicators....................................................................................................................................225
C Power Consumption and Weight.......................................................................................... 232
D Board Configuration Parameters...........................................................................................234
E Glossary...................................................................................................................................... 237
Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Hardware Description 1 Chassis
1 Chassis
The OptiX PTN 910 is case-shaped for easy deployment.

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX PTN 910 equipment.
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX PTN 910
The dimensions of the OptiX PTN 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 1 U (height, 1
U = 44.45 mm).
The PIU inputs -48 V DC power to the OptiX PTN 910, or an EPS30-4815AF external AC power
supply system inputs 220 V AC power, and converts the AC power to the DC power, and then
outputs the DC power to the OptiX PTN 910. Both DC and AC power supplies support 1+1 hot
backup.
The OptiX PTN 910 can be installed in the following:
l ETSI cabinet (300 mm deep)
l ETSI cabinet (600 mm deep)
l 19 inch cabinet (450 mm deep)
l 19 inch cabinet (600 mm deep)
l Indoor Mini Box (IMB) network box
l APM30H outdoor cabinet
l Open rack
The PTN equipment can be installed indoors or outdoors. The installation must satisfy the
requirement of running environment for equipment. To better satisfy the requirement, you can
install the equipment in an IMB network cabinet or an APM30H outdoor cabinet. Use the
Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Hardware Description 1 Chassis
EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply system to provide power to the IMB network box or
outdoor cabinet.
Figure 1-2 shows the slot allocation of the OptiX PTN 910.
Figure 1-2 Slot allocation of the OptiX PTN 910
SLOT 3 SLOT 4
SLOT SLOT
5 6 SLOT 1 and SLOT 2

Hardware Description 2 Boards
2 Boards
About This Chapter
OptiX PTN 910 include system control, cross-connect and protocol processing board, interface
boards, power supply board, and fan board.
2.1 Overview of Boards

Boards are the key hardware components of the equipment.
2.2 CXPA/CXPB
This section describes the CXPA/CXPB, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocol
processing board, with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel,
valid slots, and technical specifications.
2.3 CXPG/CXPH
This section describes the CXPG/CXPH, which integrates the control, cross-connect, and
protocol processing units, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front
panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.
2.4 TNC2CXPN
This section describes the TNC2CXPN, which integrates the control, cross-connect, and protocol
processing units, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid
slots, and technical specifications.
2.5 TNC1CXPI
This section describes the TNC1CXPI, which integrates the control, cross-connect, and protocol
2.6 TNC2CXPI
2.7 EF8T
This section describes the EF8T, which is an interface board with eight FE electrical interfaces,
with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and
technical specifications.

2.8 EF8F
This section describes the EF8F, which is an interface board with eight FE optical interfaces,
2.9 TND1EG2
This section describes the TND1EG2, which is an interface board with two GE optical interfaces,
2.10 TND2EG2
2.11 EG4F
This section describes the EG4F, a four-channel GE optical interface board, in terms of the
version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical
specifications.
2.12 TND1ML1/TND1ML1A
This section describes the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A, which is a 16 x E1 electrical interface board,
2.13 TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B
This section describes the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B, a 16-channel E1 electrical interface board,
in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and
2.14 TND1MD1A/TND1MD1B
This section describes the MD1A/MD1B, a 32-channel E1 electrical interface board, in terms
of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical
specifications.
2.15 CD1
This section describes the CD1, which is a 1 x channelized STM-1 service processing board, in
terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical
specifications.
2.16 ADS2A/ADS2B
This section describes the ADS2A/ADS2B, a 2-channel ADSL service interface board, in terms
specifications.
2.17 SHD4
This section describes the SHD4, a 4-channel G.SHDSL service interface board, in terms of the
specifications.
2.18 SHD4I
This section describes the SHD4I, a 4-channel SHDSL service interface board that supports the
IMA mode, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid
2.19 PIU

This section describes the PIU, a power input unit, in terms of the version, functions, features,
working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.
2.20 FAN
This section describes the FAN, a fan board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working
principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.

2.1 Overview of Boards

Boards are the key hardware components of the equipment.
Board Description and Valid Slots

Table 2-1 shows the boards supported by the OptiX PTN 910 and their valid slots.
Table 2-1 Boards supported by the OptiX PTN 910 and their valid slots
Board Name Board Description Valid Slot
CXPA System control, switching Slot 1 and slot 2

and timing board, with 4 x FE
service interfaces and 16 x E1
interfaces (matching 75-ohm
E1)
CXPB System control, switching Slot 1 and slot 2

service interfaces and 16 x E1
interfaces (matching 120-
ohm E1)
CXPG System control, switching Slot 1 and slot 2

service interfaces, 2 x GE
service interfaces, and 16 x
E1 interfaces (matching 75-
ohm E1)
CXPH System control, switching Slot 1 and slot 2

service interfaces, 2 x GE
service interfaces, and 16 x
E1 interfaces (matching 120-
ohm E1)
TNC1CXPI System control, switching Slot 1 and slot 2

service electrical interfaces,
with 4 x FE service optical
interfaces, and 2 x GE service
interfaces
TNC2CXPI System control, switching slot 1 and slot 2

and timing board
TNC2CXPN System control, switching slot 1 and slot 2

and timing board

EF8T 8 x FE service interface board Slot 3, slot 4

(electric interface)
EF8F 8 x FE service interface board Slot 3, slot 4

(optical interface)
TND1EG2 2 x GE service optical Slot 3, slot 4

interface board
TND2EG2 2 x GE service optical Slot 3, slot 4

interface board
TND1EG4F 4 x GE service optical slot 3, slot 4

interface board
TND1ML1 16 x E1 service interface Slot 3, slot 4

board (75 ohms)
TND1ML1A 16 x E1 service interface Slot 3, slot 4

board (120 ohms)
TND2ML1A 16 x E1 service interface Slot 3, slot 4

board (75 ohms)
TND2ML1B 16 x E1 service interface Slot 3, slot 4

board (120 ohms)
MD1A 32 x E1 service interface Slot 3, slot 4

board (75 ohms)
MD1B 32 x E1 service interface Slot 3, slot 4

board (120 ohms)
CD1 1 x channelized STM-1 Slot 3, slot 4

service optical interface
board
ADS2A/ADS2B 2 x ADSL2+ interface board Slot 3, slot 4
SHD4 4 x G.SHDSL interface board Slot 3, slot 4

(supporting the ATM mode
and EFM mode)
SHD4I 4 x G.SHDSL interface board Slot 3, slot 4

(supporting the IMA mode)
PIU Power board Slot 5
FAN Fan board Slot 6


NOTE
l The CXPA and CXPB each house two slots. Slot 1 and slot 2 house one board.
l The CXPG and CXPH each house two slots. Slot 1 and slot 2 house one board.
l The TNC2CXPN/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI houses two slots. Slot 1 and slot 2 house one board.
l The second port of the CD1 can be used for only the LMSP protection.
l The ADS2A supports the Annex A mode. The ADS2B supports the Annex B mode.
Board Relations
The OptiX PTN 910 uses different boards to achieve various functions.
Figure 2-1 shows board relations of the OptiX PTN 910.
Figure 2-1 Board relations of the OptiX PTN 910

1.Orderwire interface
2.NM network interface
3.Alarm interface
4.Synchronous data interface
5.NE serial interface
6.Clock interface
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7.Time interface
8.Concatenation interface
Network side
User side GE
Control and EF8F
FE GE
EF8F management EF8T
module
FE GE
EF8T EG2/EG4F
GE ML1/ML1A E1
EG2/EG4F /ML1B
Service E1
E1 ML1/ML1A MD1A/MD1B
/ML1B processing
E1 and
MD1A/MD1B
Channelized forwarding ADSL2+
module ADS2
STM-1
CD1
SHD4/SHD4I G.SHDSL
FE
Channelized STM-1
CD1
E1
FE
Clock module
GE
E1
CXPA/CXPB
/CXPG/CXPH/TNC1CXPI GE
/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN
Power Heat
supply dissipation
module module
PIU FAN

NOTE
Only the CXPA/CXPB supports the NM cascading interface, transparent data interface, and alarm interface.
The phone interface and transparent data interface are reserved for later use.
The GE signal can be accessed from the front panel of only the CXPG/CXPH/CXPI/CXPN.
The E1 signal can be accessed from the front panel of only the CXPA/CXPB/CXPG/CXPH.
2.2 CXPA/CXPB
This section describes the CXPA/CXPB, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocol
processing board, with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel,
valid slots, and technical specifications.
NOTE
The matched impedance of the E1 service interface on the CXPA is 75 ohms and the matched impedance
of the E1 interface on the CXPB is 120 ohms. The CXPA and CXPB have the same functions and features,
except for the impedance of the E1 service interfaces.
2.2.1 Version Description

The functional version of the CXPA/CXPB is TNC1.
The OptiX PTN 910 supports the following system control boards, TNC1CXPA, TNC1CXPB,
TNC1CXPG, TNC1CXPH, TNC1CXPI, TNC2CXPI, and TNC2CXPN:
l The switching capacity, interface types and numbers of each board differ.
l Compared with the other system control boards, TNC2CXPN supports more ARP entries,
PWs, tunnels, labels, and VSIs.
l On a TNC2CXPN, ACLs can be applied on traffic in queues in the ingress direction at the
VUNI side.
l TNC2CXPI and TNC2CXPN support port mirroring.
l TNC2CXPN supports 1588 ACR unicast.
2.2.2 Functions and Features

The CXPA/CXPB accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals and 16 x E1 signals, grooms
services, performs the system control, processes the system clock, and provides auxiliary
interfaces.
Table 2-2 lists the functions and features of the CXPA/CXPB.
Table 2-2 Functions and Features of the CXPA/CXPB
Function and Feature Description
Basic function Cross-connect capacity 6.5 Gbit/s
Line Rate I/O Capability 4.43 Gbit/s

using the CXPA/CXPB

Accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals and 16 x E1

signals. In the case of the E1 services, the IMA, CES, and
ML-PPP protocols are supported.
DCN Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is

enabled at all the ports. In addition, this function can be
disabled or enabled manually.
Fractional E1 Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kbit/s level.
Auxiliary interface function Provides one NM serial port or NM network port to

communicate with the NMS so that the NMS can manage and
query the equipment.
Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the
external clock/time to obtain the external clock/time
information.The CLK1/TOD1 port can be used to monitor AC
input/output of the EPS30–4815 power supply system.
Provides one alarm input/output interface for three alarm
inputs and one alarm output.
Provides one extended network port or 64 kbit/s synchronous
data port. The extended network port is used to realize the
cascading of Huawei equipment. The 64 kbit/s synchronous
data port, which is compliant with ITU-T G.703, is used to
transparently transmit other NM data.
Provides one orderwire interface.The orderwire interface is
reserved for later use.
Interface function Working mode of the FE port Auto-Negotiation, 100M

Full-Duplex
Type of the loopback at the PHY-layer inloop

FE port MAC-layer outloop
Automatic loopback release Supported

at the port
Collection of bandwidth Supported

utilization statistics at an
Ethernet/IMA/ML-PPP port
LAG Intra-board LAG Supported
Inter-board LAG Supported
ATM/IMA Number of supported IMA 8

groups
/supported ATM E1 services

Maximum number of E1 16
links or 64kbit/s level serial
ports in each IMA group
Dynamically enables or disables the IMA group, restarts the

IMA group protocol, and dynamically adds or deletes the
IMA group members.
Supported traffic type CBR

UBR
UBR+
rt-VBR
nrt-VBR
Number of supported ATM 256 remote connections

connections 128 local connections
(VPC and VCC included)
Number of supported ATM 64

services
Encapsulates the ATM VPC/VCC services to the PWE3 in

the N-to-1 (N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.
Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation

and non-concatenation modes. The number of PW
connections that support the cell concatenation is 64, and the
maximum number of concatenated cells is 31.
ATM OAM on the UNI side Supports the CC test.

and NNI side
Supports the LB test.
CES Number of supported CES 16

services
Supported emulation mode CESoPSN

SAToP
Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle

64 kbit/s timeslot suppression function for the CES services
in the CESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth.
Supported clock mode Retiming mode
The jitter compensation buffer time of the CES service can be

set. The jitter buffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and
the step value is 0.125 ms.

The packet loading time of the CES service can be set. The
encapsulation buffer time ranges from 0.25 ms to 3 ms, and
ML-PPP Number of supported ML- 7

PPP groups
Maximum number of links 16

supported by each ML-PPP
group
Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI

interface to access IP packets of the L3VPN services.
PRBS Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of

an E1 port in the receive/transmit direction.
APS Supports MPLS Tunnel APS.

Supports 1:1 PW APS with dual-ended switching.
MPLS Tunnel OAM Supported
PW OAM Supported
BFD Supports BFD with a period of 3.3 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms,
100 ms, or 1s.
Black list and white list of Supported

MAC addresses
Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported
SSM protocol Supported by the FE ports
IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported
1588 ACR clock (multicast) Supported
2.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The CXPA/CXPB consists of the control module, auxiliary interface module, service grooming
and processing module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-2 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CXPA/CXPB.

Figure 2-2 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPA/CXPB
Backplane
External time/ Clock signals

2-channel external time/
clock signals Interface boards
clock input/output interface Clock Working
clock Each
NM network interface/ module signals module
serial interface on the
Extended network interface/ Auxiliary board
NM network interface/serial
transparent data interface interface signals
interface
Alarm input/output interface module Extended network
interface signals
Alarm input/output Time/clock signals
Orderwire interface
signals
Orderwire Transparent
signals data signals
Management bus
Interface boards
Control module
CF card
Management bus
4 x FE electrical signals
Service
grooming and Service bus
16 x E1 signals Interface boards
processing
module
3.3 V
Interface boards
Power 12 V
Working power FAN
Each module on the board supply -48 V/-60 V System power
module supply
-48 V/-60 V System power

supply
Control Module
This module performs the following functions:
l Configures and monitors the CXPA/CXPB and the entire system.

l Enables the communication through the NM serial interface and NM Ethernet interface.
l Enables the communication based on the extended Ethernet interface.
l Provides a pluggable CF card. Main functions of the CF card are as follows:
– Software package storage: During an NE upgrade in the package loading mode, the CF
card is used to store the software package used for the upgrade.
– Data backup: The NE logs and database are periodically backed up from the FLASH
chip to the CF card for fault recovery.
– Configuration restoration: If the CF RCV button is pressed down for 5s, configuration
information in the CF card can be automatically restored to the device.

Service Grooming and Processing Module

l Accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals.

l Accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals.
l Processes the services accessed by the interface boards.
l Supports the CES, ML-PPP, and IMA protocols for E1 services.
l Grooms services with 6.5 Gbit/s switching capacity in the full-duplex mode.
l Supports 4.43 Gbit/s line rate I/O capability of the system.
Auxiliary Interface Module

l Provides two interfaces for input and output of the external clock/time.The CLK1/TOD1
port can be used to monitor AC input/output of the EPS30–4815 power supply system.
l Provides one NM serial interface or NM Ethernet interface for communication with the
NMS, management and queries of the equipment.
l Provides one alarm input/output interface to input three channels of alarms and output one
channel of alarms.
l Provides one orderwire interface.
l Provides one extended network port or 64 kbit/s synchronous data port. The extended
network port is used to realize the cascading of Huawei equipment. The 64 kbit/s
synchronous data port, which is compliant with ITU-T G.703, is used to transparently
transmit other NM data.
NOTE
The orderwire interface is reserved for later use.
Clock Module
l Provides the system clock signals and processes the clock signals from the service boards
and the external clock/time interfaces.
l Provides the working clock for each module on the CXPA/CXPB.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and the SSM protocol.
l Supports the IEEE 1588V2 protocol.
l Supports the 1588 ACR clock.
Power Supply Module

l Accesses two - 48 V DC or - 60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies working power for each module on the CXPA/CXPB.
l Supplies 12 V power for the FAN board.

l Supplies 3.3 V power for other boards.
2.2.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the CXPA/CXPB, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 2-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CXPA/CXPB.
Figure 2-3 Front panels of the CXPA and CXPB
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CXPA/CXPB:
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program
l SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status
l SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
l CRIT indicator, red, which indicates critical alarms
l MAJ indicator, orange, which indicates major alarms
l MIN indicator, yellow, which indicates minor alarms
l LINK indicator, green, which indicates the port connection status
l ACT indicator, yellow, which indicates the data transceiving status of the port
NOTE
The LINK and ACT indicators, which are present above ETH/OAM, EXT/F1, and FE service interface,
indicate the connection status of the Ethernet interface.
For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.
Button
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the CXPA/CXPB:
l RST button, which is used for warm reset of the board. When you press the RST button
and then release it, the board is reset (warm).
l CF RCV button, which is used to restore the configuration data from the CF card. When
you press the CF RCV button for 5 seconds, the equipment automatically restores the
configuration data from the CF card.

l LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button,
except the LINK indicators on the ADS2A/ADS2B, the FE electrical service port indicators
on the EF8T/CXPA/CXPB, and LINK indicators on the EF8F board all the board indicators
on the NE are on.
Interface
Table 2-3 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPA/CXPB.
Table 2-3 Types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPA/CXPB
Interface Interface Usage Pin Correspondi

on the Type ng Cable
Front
Panel
ETH/ RJ-45 10M/100M interface for NM For details, see For details, see
OAM network port or NM serial port Table 2-4. 8.7
Management
Cables.
CLK1/ RJ-45 External clock/time input/ For details, see For details, see
TOD1 output interface Table 2-5 and 8.8 Clock
Common interface for Table 2-6. Cables. The
inputting and outputting the monitor cable
AC power input monitoring needs to be
signals for the EPS30–4815 made on site.
power supply system For details, see
Table 2-6 and
CLK2/ RJ-45 External clock/time input/ Table 6-5.
TOD2 output interface
EXT/F1 RJ-45 10Base-T/100Base-TX For details, see For details, see

extended Ethernet interface or Table 2-7. 8.7
64 kbit/s synchronous data Management
interface Cables.
PHONE RJ-45 Orderwire interface For details, see For details, see
Table 2-8. 8.7
Management
Cables.
ALMI/ RJ-45 3 x alarm inputs and 1 x alarm For details, see For details, see
ALMO output interface Table 2-9. 8.9 Alarm
Input/Output
Cables.
FE1 - FE4 RJ-45 Input/output interface for FE For details, see For details, see
electrical signals Table 2-10. 8.6.1 Ethernet
Cables.

Interface Interface Usage Pin Correspondi

on the Type ng Cable
Front
Panel
E1 (1 - 16) Anea 96 E1 service input/output For details, see For details, see
interface Table 2-11 8.6.2 75-Ohm
16 x E1
Cables and
8.6.3 120-
Ohm 16 x E1
Cables.
NOTE
The FE1 to FE4 interfaces, ETH/OAM interface and EXT/F1 interface support auto-adaptation to a
straight-through cable or a crossover cable.
The matched impedance of the E1 service interface on the CXPA is 75 ohms and the matched impedance
of the E1 interface on the CXPB is 120 ohms.
When the CLK1/TOD1 interface is used as an input/output interface for monitoring signals, you need to
modify Interface Type on the U2000. For details on how to modify Interface Type on the U2000, see
Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface in the OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of
PTN Series Configuration Guide.
The F1 interface and PHONE interface are reserved for later use.
Table 2-4 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Transmit positive of the NM interface

87654321 2 Transmit negative of the NM interface
3 Receive positive of the NM interface
4 Grounding end of the NM serial interface
5 Receive end of the NM serial interface
6 Receive negative of the NM interface
7 Undefined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial interface

Table 2-5 Pins of the CLK1/TOD1 or CLK2/TOD2 used as an external clock/time interface
External External External External External

Clock Time Input Time Time Input Time Output
(1PPS + Time Output (DCLS) (DCLS)
Information) (1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
1 Negative Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified

receive end
87654321
of external
clock
2 Positive Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified

receive end
of external
clock
3 Unspecified Negative input Negative Negative Negative

for the 1pps output for the input for the output for the
signal 1pps signal DCLS time DCLS time
(RS422 level) (RS422 level) signal signal
(RS422 (RS422 level)
level)
4 Negative Grounding end Grounding Grounding Grounding end

transmit end end end
of external
clock
5 Positive Grounding end Grounding Grounding Grounding end

transmit end end end
of external
clock
6 Unspecified Positive input Positive Positive Positive output

for the 1pps output for the input for the for the DCLS
signal 1pps signal DCLS time time signal
(RS422 level) (RS422 level) signal (RS422 level)
(RS422
level)
7 Unspecified Negative input Negative Unspecified Unspecified

for time output for
information time
(RS422 level) information
(RS422 level)

External External External External External

Clock Time Input Time Time Input Time Output
(1PPS + Time Output (DCLS) (DCLS)
Information) (1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
8 Unspecified Positive input Positive Unspecified Unspecified

for time output for
information time
(RS422 level) information
(RS422 level)
NOTE
The CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding five working modes.
Table 2-6 Pins of the CLK1/TOD1 interface used as an input/output interface for monitoring
signals
1 Unspecified
87654321 2 Unspecified
3 Transmit negative
4 Grounding end
5 Grounding end
6 Transmit positive
7 Receive negative
8 Receive positive
Table 2-7 Pins of the EXT/F1 interface
1 Transmit positive of the extended Ethernet

interface
87654321
2 Transmit negative of the extended Ethernet

interface

3 Receive positive of the extended Ethernet

interface
4 Transmit positive of the 64 kbit/s

synchronous data interface
5 Transmit negative of the 64 kbit/s

6 Receive negative of the extended Ethernet

interface
7 Receive positive of the 64 kbit/s synchronous

data interface
8 Receive negative of the 64 kbit/s synchronous

data interface
Table 2-8 Pins of the PHONE interface
Front View Pin Purpose
1-3 Undefined
87654321 4 RING
5 TIP
6-8 Undefined
Table 2-9 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
1 Alarm input 1
87654321 2 Grounding end for alarm input 1
3 Alarm input 2
4 Alarm input 3
5 Grounding end for alarm input 3
7 Alarm output positive
8 Alarm output negative

Table 2-10 Pins of the FE1-FE4 interfaces
1 Positive of twisted pair 1

87654321 2 Negative of twisted pair 1
4 Undefined
5 Undefined
6 Negative of twisted pair 2
7 Undefined
8 Undefined
Table 2-11 Pins of the Anea 96 interface
Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage
1 Rx1 25 Tx1
2 26
3 Rx2 27 Tx2
4 28
5 Rx3 29 Tx3
6 30
7 Rx4 31 Tx4
8 32
9 Rx5 33 Tx5
10 34
11 Rx6 35 Tx6
12 36
13 Rx7 37 Tx7
14 38
15 Rx8 39 Tx8
16 40
17 Rx9 41 Tx9

18 42
19 R x 10 43 T x 10
20 44
21 R x 11 45 T x 11
22 46
23 R x 12 47 T x 12
24 48
49 R x 13 73 T x 13
50 74
51 R x 14 75 T x 14
52 76
53 R x 15 77 T x 15
54 78
55 R x 16 79 T x 16
56 80
2.2.5 Valid Slots

Two slots house one CXPA/CXPB. The CXPA/CXPB can be housed in slot 1 and slot 2.
2.2.6 Board Configuration Reference

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the CXPA/CXPB.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the CXPA/CXPB:
l Ethernet interface
l PDH interface
l Environment monitor interface
l External time interface
l Phase-locked source output by External clock
For details on the parameters, see D Board Configuration Parameters.
2.2.7 Technical Specifications

The technical specifications of the CXPA/CXPB include the interface specifications, board
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Interface Specifications
The interface specifications of the CXPA/CXPB are as follows:
l For specifications of FE electrical interfaces, see Table 2-12.

l For specifications of E1 interfaces, see Table 2-13.
Table 2-12 Specifications of FE electrical interfaces
Item Specification
Electrical interface rate 100 Mbit/s
RJ-45 electrical interface specification The specifications of the RJ-45 electrical

interfaces comply with the following
regulations:
l IEEE 802.3 and enterprise regulations
Table 2-13 Specifications of E1 interfaces
Item Specification Requirement
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Interface impedance 75 ohms (CXPA)

120 ohms (CXPB)
Interface code HDB3
Pulse waveform at the output interface Complies with ITU-T G.703
Attenuation tolerance of the input 0 to 6

interface at the point with a frequency of
1024 kHz (dB)
Anti-interference capability of the input Complies with ITU-T G.703

interface
Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823
Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823
Other Specifications
Other specifications of the CXPA/CXPB are as follows:
l Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 226.00 (D) x 388.40 (W)

l Weight (kg): 1.25
l Power consumption (W, room temperature): 43.9

2.3 CXPG/CXPH
This section describes the CXPG/CXPH, which integrates the control, cross-connect, and
protocol processing units, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front
panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.
NOTE
The matched impedance of the E1 service interface on the CXPG is 75 ohms and that on the CXPH is 120
ohms. The CXPG and CXPH have the same functions and features, except for the impedance of the
interfaces.

The functional version of the CXPG/CXPH is TNC1.
VUNI side.

The CXPG/CXPH accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals, 2 x GE optical/electrical
signals, and 16 x E1 signals, grooms services, performs the system control, processes the system
clock, and provides auxiliary interfaces.
Table 2-14 lists the functions and features of the CXPG/CXPH.
Table 2-14 Functions and features of the CXPG/CXPH

using the CXPG/CXPH
Accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals, 2 x GE

optical/electrical signals, and 16 x E1 signals.

enabled at all the ports. In addition, this function can be
Fractional E1 Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kibt/s level.


information.The CLK1/TOD1 port can be used to monitor AC
input/output of the EPS30–4815 power supply system.
Provides one orderwire interface. The orderwire interface is
Interface function Working mode of the GE port Auto-Negotiation, 1000M

Full-Duplex
Working mode of the FE port Auto-Negotiation, 100M

Full-Duplex
Type of the loopback at the PHY-layer inloop and

GE port outloop
MAC-layer outloop


at the port

Ethernet/IMA/ML-PPP port
ATM/IMA Number of supported ATM 8

E1 services
Number of supported IMA 8

groups
links or 64kbit/s serial ports
in each IMA group

IMA group members.


UBR
UBR+
rt-VBR
nrt-VBR


services
Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-

to-1 (N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.


and NNI side

services

SAToP



PPP groups

group




PW OAM Supported
100 ms, or 1s.

MAC addresses
Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported by the FE

electrical interfaces and GE
optical interfaces
SSM protocol Supported
IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported by the FE

electrical interfaces and GE
optical interfaces

The CXPG/CXPH consists of the auxiliary interface module, control and communication
module, service grooming and processing module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-4 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CXPG/CXPH.

Figure 2-4 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPG/CXPH
Two external time/clock Backplane

input/output interfaces Two external
Clock
time/clock signals
NMS network port or NMS Auxiliary signal
Interface boards
serial port Each Clock Clock
interface
module signal module
Orderwire interface module
on the
board
NMS
signal
Orderwire
signal
Control and
communication module Management bus
Interface boards
CF card
Management bus
2 x GE signals
Service
4 x FE electrical signals grooming and Service bus
Interface boards
processing
16 x E1 signals
module
3.3 V
Interface boards
Working power 12 V
Each module supply Power
FAN
on the board supply -48 V/-60 V System power
module supply
-48 V/-60 V System power
supply

l Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the external clock/time.The CLK1/
TOD1 port can be used to monitor AC input/output of the EPS30–4815 power supply
system.
l Provides one NM serial port or NM network port for communicating with the NMS,
managing the equipment, and querying the equipment.
NOTE
Control and Communication Module

l Configures and monitors the CXPG/CXPH and the entire system.

l Enables the communication through the NM serial port or NM network port.


l Accesses and processes 2 x GE optical/electrical signals.
l Accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals.
l Processes the service signals accessed by the interface boards.
l Supports the CES, ML-PPP, and IMA protocols for E1 services.
l Supports 6.43 Gbit/s line rate I/O capability of the system.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the CXPG/CXPH.
Power Supply Module

l Accesses two -48 V or -60 V DC power supplies.
l Supplies working power for each module on the CXPG/CXPH.
l Supplies 3.3 V power for the interface board.
2.3.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the CXPG/CXPH, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.

Figure 2-5 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CXPG/CXPH.

Figure 2-5 Appearances of the front panel of the CXPG and CXPH
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CXPG/CXPH:
l L/A1 and L/A2 indicators, orange or green, which indicate the connection status of the port
l LINK indicator, green, which indicates the port connection status
NOTE
Above the ETH/OAM and four FE service interfaces, five pairs of LINK and ACT indicators are present,
which indicate the connection status of the Ethernet interface.
For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.
Buttons
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the CXPG/CXPH:
you hold down the CF RCV button for five seconds, the equipment automatically restores
the configuration data from the CF card.
on the EF8T/CXPG/CXPH, the LINK indicators on the EF8F, and the L/A indicators on
the CXPG/CXPH, all the board indicators on the NE are on.
Interfaces
Table 2-15 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPG/CXPH.

Table 2-15 Interfaces on the CXPG/CXPH
Interface Interfac Usage Pin Correspondin

Name e Type g Cable
ETH/ RJ-45 10M/100M interface for NM For details, see For details, see
OAM network port or NM serial Table 2-16. 8.7
port Management
Cables.
CLK1/ RJ-45 External time/clock input/ For details, see For details, see
TOD1 output interface Table 2-17 and 8.8 Clock
CLK2/ The CLK1/TOD1 for Table 2-18. Cables.The
TOD2 inputting and outputting the monitor cable
AC power input monitoring needs to be
signals for the EPS30–4815 made on site.
power supply system For details, see
Table 2-18 and
Table 6-5.
PHONE RJ-45 Orderwire interface For details, see For details, see
Table 2-19. 8.7
Management
Cables.
FE1 to RJ-45 Input/output interface for FE For details, see For details, see
FE4 electrical signals Table 2-20. 8.6.1 Ethernet
Cables.
OUT1 SFP Input/output interface for GE For details, see For details, see
IN1, optical/electrical signals Table 2-21 and 8.1.1 Fiber
OUT2 Table 2-22. Types and 8.6.1
IN2 Ethernet
Cables.
E1 (1 to Anea 96 E1 service input/output For details, see For details, see

16) interface Table 2-23. 8.6.2 75-Ohm
16 x E1
Cablesand 8.6.3
120-Ohm 16 x
E1 Cables.
NOTE
The FE1 to FE4 interfaces and ETH/OAM interface support auto-adaptation to a straight-through network
cable or a crossover cable.
The matched impedance of the E1 service interface on the CXPG is 75 ohms and the matched impedance
of the E1 interface on the CXPH is 120 ohms.
When the CLK1/TOD1 interface is used as an input/output interface for monitoring signals, you need to
modify Interface Type on the U2000. For details on how to modify Interface Type on the U2000, see
Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface in the OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of
PTN Series Configuration Guide.
The F1 interface and PHONE interface are reserved for later use.

Table 2-16 lists the pins of the ETH/OAM interface.
1 Transmit positive of the NM network port

87654321 2 Transmit negative of the NM network port
3 Receive positive of the NM network port
4 Grounding end of the NM serial port
5 Receive end of the NM serial port
6 Receive negative of the NM network port
7 Unspecified
8 Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 2-17 lists the pins of the CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces.
Front View Pi Working Mode

n
Externa External External Time External Time External Time
l Clock Time Input Output Input Output
(1PPS + (1PPS + Time (DCLS) (DCLS)
Time Information)
Informatio
n)
1 Receive Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified

negative
87654321
of the
CLK

positive
of the
CLK
3 Unspeci Input Output negative Input negative Output negative

fied negative for for the 1PPS for the DCLS for the DCLS
the 1PPS signal time signal time signal
signal (RS422 level) (RS422 level) (RS422 level)
(RS422 level)

Front View Pi Working Mode

n
Externa External External Time External Time External Time
l Clock Time Input Output Input Output
(1PPS + (1PPS + Time (DCLS) (DCLS)
Time Information)
Informatio
n)
4 Transmi Grounding Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end

t end
negative
of the
CLK
5 Transmi Grounding Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end

t end
positive
of the
CLK
6 Unspeci Input positive Output positive Input positive Output positive

fied for the 1PPS for the 1PPS for the DCLS for the DCLS
signal signal time signal time signal
(RS422 level) (RS422 level) (RS422 level) (RS422 level)
7 Unspeci Input Output negative Unspecified Unspecified

fied negative for for the time
the time information
information (RS422 level)
(RS422 level)
8 Unspeci Input positive Output positive Unspecified Unspecified

fied for the time for the time
information information
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)
NOTE
The CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the
preceding five working modes.
Table 2-18 Pins of the CLK1/TOD1 interface used as an input/output interface for monitoring
signals
1 Unspecified

3 Transmit negative
4 Grounding end
5 Grounding end
6 Transmit positive
7 Receive negative
8 Receive positive
Table 2-19 lists the pins of the PHONE interface.
1 to 3 Unspecified
87654321 4 RING
5 TIP
6 to 8 Unspecified
Table 2-20 lists the pins of the FE1 interface to FE4 interface.
Table 2-20 Pins of the FE1 interface to FE4 interface

4 Undefined
5 Undefined
7 Undefined
8 Undefined
Table 2-21 and Table 2-22 list the pins of the OUT1 IN1 and OUT2 IN2 interfaces.

Table 2-21 Pins of the GE optical interfaces
Interface on the Front Interface Usage

Panel Type
Optical IN1 to IN2 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is

interface used, this interface is used as an input interface
for the GE optical signal.
When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module
is used, this interface is not used.
OUT1 to LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is

OUT2 used, this interface is used as an output interface
for the GE optical signal.
When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module
is used, this interface is used as an input/output
interface for the GE optical signal.
Electrical OUT1 IN1 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals

interface to OUT2
IN2
NOTE
The GE SFP interface on the front panel can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface.
When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it needs to be used with an optical module.
l When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left and
right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive
service signals.
l When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the left
side of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit and
receive service signals at the same time.
When the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it needs to be used with an electrical module.
Table 2-22 Pins of the GE electrical module
1 Positive of twisted pair cable 1
87654321 2 Negative of twisted pair cable 1
5 Negative of twisted pair cable 3

1 Rx1 25 Tx1
2 26
3 Rx2 27 Tx2
4 28
5 Rx3 29 Tx3
6 30
7 Rx4 31 Tx4
8 32
9 Rx5 33 Tx5
10 34
11 Rx6 35 Tx6
12 36
13 Rx7 37 Tx7
14 38
15 Rx8 39 Tx8
16 40
17 Rx9 41 Tx9
18 42
19 R x 10 43 T x 10
20 44
21 R x 11 45 T x 11
22 46
23 R x 12 47 T x 12
24 48
49 R x 13 73 T x 13
50 74
51 R x 14 75 T x 14
52 76
53 R x 15 77 T x 15

54 78
55 R x 16 79 T x 16
56 80
2.3.5 Valid Slots

Two slots house one CXPG/CXPH. The CXPG/CXPH can be housed in slots 1 and 2.

The CXPG/CXPH can be configured through the U2000.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the CXPG/CXPH:
l PDH interface

The technical specifications of the CXPG cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,
weight, and power consumption.
The interface specifications of the CXPG are as follows:
l For the specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface, see Table 2-24.
l For the specifications of the GE optical interface, see Table 2-25.
l For the specifications of the E1 interface, see Table 2-28.
Table 2-24 Specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface
FE electrical interface GE electrical interface

(electrical module)
Interface rate 100 Mbit/s. 1000 Mbit/s.
RJ-45 electrical Complies with IEEE 802.3 and enterprise regulations.

interface specification

Table 2-25 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface
Item Specification
Optical Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectional

interface interface
type
1000BAS 1000BAS 1000BAS 1000BASE 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-
E-SX E-LX E-VX -ZX CWDM BX BX
(0.5 km) (10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km) (10 km) (40 km)
Fiber type Multi- Single- Single- Single- Single- Single- Single-

mode mode mode mode mode mode mode
Working 770 to 860 1270 to 1260 to 1500 to For details, For details, For details,
wavelength 1360 1360 1580 see see see
range (nm) wavelength wavelength wavelength
allocation of allocation of allocation of
1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-
CWDM BX optical BX optical
optical interfaces interfaces
interfaces and related and related
and related optical optical
optical module module
module code. code.
code.
Mean -9.5 to 0 -11 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to 5 0 to 5 -9 to -3 -3 to 3

launched
optical
power
(dBm)
Receiver -17 -19 -23 -23 -28 -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3 -9 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9 8.2 6 6
extinction
ratio (dB)

Item Specification
Optical 34060286 34060473 34060298 34060360 For details, For details, For details,
module 34060290 see see see
code wavelength wavelength wavelength
module code. code.
code.
NOTE
For details of the optical module, see 4.2 Optical Module Labels.
Table 2-26 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module code
SN Optical module Wavelength (nm) SN Optical Wavelength (nm)

code module code
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Table 2-27 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code
Item Local Remote
Optical module code 34060470 34060475

(10 km)
Optical part number 34060539 34060540

(40 km)
Transmitter wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500
Receiver wavelength (nm) 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360

Table 2-28 Specifications of the E1 interface
Interface impedance 75 ohms (CXPG)

120 ohms (CXPH)
Interface code HDB3

interface at the point with a frequency
of 1024 kHz (dB)

interface
Board dimensions (mm): 20.3 (H) x 226.0 (D) x 388.4 (W)
Board weight (kg): 1.32
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 46.8
2.4 TNC2CXPN
This section describes the TNC2CXPN, which integrates the control, cross-connect, and protocol

The functional version of the TNC2CXPN is TNC2.
VUNI side.


The TNC2CXPN accesses and processes 2 x FE/GE electrical signals, 2 x FE electrical signals,
4 x GE optical signals, and 4 x FE optical signals, grooms services, performs the system control,
processes the system clock, and provides auxiliary interfaces.
Table 2-29 lists the functions and features of the TNC2CXPN.
Table 2-29 Functions and features of the TNC2CXPN

using the TNC2CXPN
Accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals, 4 x FE

optical signals, and 2 x GE optical/electrical signals.

enabled at all the FE/GE ports. In addition, this function can
be disabled or enabled manually.

information. The CLK1/TOD1 interface can be used as a
common interface for inputting and outputting the AC power
input monitoring signals for the EPS30–4815 power supply
system.
Provides one alarm input and output interface.
Interface function Working mode of the GE port Auto-Negotiation, 100M

Full-Duplex
Working mode of the GE/FE Auto-Negotiation, 100M

port Full-Duplex, 1000M Full-
Duplex
Working mode of the FE port Auto-Negotiation, 10M Full-

Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex
Type of the loopback at the MAC-layer inloop and

GE port outloop

GE/FE port outloop

Type of the loopback at the PHY-layer outloop

FE port MAC-layer inloop and
outloop

at the port

utilization statistics at a port

PW OAM Supported
100 ms, or 1s.

MAC addresses
IEEE 1588v2 protocol Supported
1588 ACR clock (unicast and Supported

multicast)
Note 1: A GE optical interface with an electrical module does not support synchronous
Ethernet, IEEE 1588v2 or 1588 ACR (multicast).
Note 2: When the FE electrical interfaces on the board work in 10 Mbit/s mode, synchronous
Ethernet, IEEE 1588v2 and 1588 ACR (multicast) are not applicable.
Note 3: Only when the FE/GE5 and FE/GE6 electrical interfaces on the board work in 1000
Mbit/s mode, IEEE 1588v2 and 1588 ACR (multicast) are applicable.

The TNC2CXPN consists of the auxiliary interface module, control and communication module,
service grooming and processing module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-6 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TNC2CXPN.

Figure 2-6 Block diagram for the working principle of the TNC2CXPN
time/clock signals Clock signal Interface
NMS network port Auxiliary
or NMS serial port Each Clock Clock boards
interface
Alarm input and module signal module
output interface
module on the
board
NM NMS
commissioning signal
signal
Management bus Interface

Control and
boards
communication module
CF card
Management bus
2 x FE/GE electrical signals
4 x FE electrical signals Service

grooming and Service bus
Interface
4 x FE optical signals processing boards
module
4 x GE optical signals
3.3V Interface
Power 12V boards
Each module Working power supply FAN
on the board supply -48V/-60V
System
module power supply
-48V/-60V System
power supply

l Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the external clock/time.
l Provides one NM serial port or network port for communication with the NMS so that the
NE can be managed and queried on the NMS.
l Provides one alarm input and output interface.

l Configures and monitors the TNC2CXPN and the entire system.

l Supports the communication through the orderwire.


l Accesses and processes 2 x GE/FE optical/electrical signals.
l Accesses and processes 4 x GE optical signals.
l Accesses and processes 4 x FE optical signals.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the CXPN.
Power Supply Module

l Supplies working power for each module on the TNC2CXPN.
2.4.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TNC2CXPN, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.

Figure 2-7 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TNC2CXPN.
Figure 2-7 Appearance of the front panel of the TNC2CXPN

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TNC2CXPN:
l ALM indicator, red, green or orange, which indicates the alarm status
l GE L/A1 to GE L/A2, FE L/A1 to FE L/A4 indicators, orange or green, which indicate the
connection status of the port
NOTE
Above the ETH/OAM, FE/GE5, FE/GE6, FE7 and FE8, five pairs of LINK and ACT indicators are present,
Buttons
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the TNC2CXPN:
Interfaces
Table 2-30 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the TNC2CXPN.
Table 2-30 Interfaces on the TNC2CXPN
Interface Interface Usage Pin Corresponding

Name Type Cable
ETH/OAM RJ45 10M/100M interface for NM network For details, see Table For details, see 8.7
port or NM serial port 2-31. Management
Cables.
CLK1/ RJ45 External time/clock input/output For details, see Table For details, see 8.8
TOD1, interface 2-32and Table 2-33. Clock Cables.
CLK2/ CLK1/TOD1 can also be used as a The monitor cable
TOD2 common interface for inputting and needs to be made
outputting AC power input monitoring on site. For details,
signals for the EPS30-4815 power see Table 2-33
supply system. and Table 6-5.
ALMI/ RJ45 3 x alarm inputs and 1 x alarm output For details, see Table For details, see 8.9
ALMO interface 2-34. Alarm Input/
Output Cables.


Name Type Cable
GE1 to SFP Input/output interface for GE optical/ For details, see Table For details, see
GE4 electrical signals 2-35 and Table 8.1.1 Fiber Types
2-36. and 8.6.1
Ethernet Cables.
FE1 to FE4 SFP Input/output interface for FE optical For details, see Table For details, see
signals 2-37. 8.1.1 Fiber
Types.
FE/GE5, RJ45 Input/output interface for GE or FE For details, see Table For details, see
FE/GE6 electrical signals 2-38. 8.6.1 Ethernet
Cables.
FE7, FE8 RJ45 Input/output interface for FE electrical For details, see Table For details, see
signals 2-39. 8.6.1 Ethernet
Cables.
NOTE
The FE7, FE8 and ETH/OAM interfaces support auto-adaptation to a straight-through network cable or a crossover cable.
When the CLK1/TOD1 interface is used as an input/output interface for monitoring signals, you need to modify Interface Type
on the U2000. For details on how to modify Interface Type on the U2000, see Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface
in the OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide.

7 Unspecified

Front View Pin Working Mode
External External Time External Time External External Time

Clock Input Output Time Input Output
(1PPS + Time (1PPS + Time (DCLS) (DCLS)
Information) Information)

negative
87654321
of the
CLK

positive
of the
CLK
3 Unspecif Input negative Output negative Input negative Output negative

ied for the 1PPS for the 1PPS for the DCLS for the DCLS
4 Transmit Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end

negative
of the
CLK

positive
of the
CLK
6 Unspecif Input positive Output positive Input positive Output positive

7 Unspecif Input negative Output negative Unspecified Unspecified

ied for the time for the time
8 Unspecif Input positive Output positive Unspecified Unspecified

NOTE

Table 2-33 Pins of the CLK1/TOD1 interface used as a monitor and input/output interface
1 Unspecified
3 Transmit negative
4 Grounding end
5 Grounding end
6 Transmit positive
7 Receive negative
8 Receive positive
Table 2-34 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO
1 Alarm input 1
3 Alarm input 2
4 Alarm input 3
Table 2-35 Description of the GE optical interface

Panel Type
Optical GE1 IN1 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is

interface to GE4 used, this interface is used as an input interface for
IN4 the GE optical signal.
When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is
used, this interface is not used.


Panel Type
GE1 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is

OUT1 to used, this interface is used as an output interface for
GE4 the GE optical signal.
OUT4 When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is
used, this interface is used as an input/output
Electrical GE1 to RJ45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals

interface GE4
NOTE
service signals.
Table 2-37 Description of the FE optical interface
Interface on the Interface Type Usage

Front Panel
FE1 IN1 to FE4 IN2 LC Input interface for FE optical signals


Front Panel
FE1 OUT1 to FE4 LC Output interface for FE optical signals

OUT2
NOTE
The SFP interface should be used with an optical module.
Table 2-38 Pins of the FE/GE electrical interface

Table 2-39 Pins of the FE electrical interface

4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
2.4.5 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TNC2CXPN. The TNC2CXPN can be housed in slots 1 and 2.


The TNC2CXPI can be configured through the U2000.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the TNC2CXPI:

The technical specifications of the TNC2CXPN cover the interface specifications, board
The interface specifications of the TNC2CXPN are as follows:
l For the specifications of the GE optical interface, see Table 2-40; Table 2-43 lists the
specifications of the SPF interface with an electrical module.
l For the specifications of the FE optical interface, see Table 2-44.
l For the specifications of the GE/FE electrical interface, see Table 2-45.
l For the specifications of the FE electrical interface, see Table 2-46.
Item Specification

interface interface
type
(0.5 km) (10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km) (10 km) (40 km)


Item Specification
module code. code.
code.

launched
optical
power
(dBm)
Receiver -17 -19 -23 -23 -28 -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3 -9 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9 8.2 6 6
extinction
ratio (dB)
module code. code.
code.
NOTE


code module code
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Item Local Remote

(10 km)

(40 km)
Table 2-43 Interface specifications of the GE electrical module
Item Specification
Interface rate 1000 Mbit/s
RJ-45 electrical interface Complies with IEEE 802.3.

specification
Table 2-44 Performance specifications of the FE optical interface
Item Specification
Optical interface type Two-fiber bidirectional interface
100BASE-FX 100BASE-FX 100BASE-FX

(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Working wavelength 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

range (nm)

Item Specification
Mean launched optical -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

power (dBm)
Receiver sensitivity -28 -34 -34

(dBm)
Minimum overload -8 -10 -10

(dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 10 10

(dB)
Optical module code 34060276 34060281 34060282

34060307 34060308 34060309
NOTE
Table 2-45 Specifications of the GE/FE electrical interface
Interface rate 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing

specification
Table 2-46 Specifications of the FE electrical interface
Interface rate 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s auto-sensing

specification

2.5 TNC1CXPI

The functional version of the TNC1CXPI is TNC1.
VUNI side.

The TNC1CXPI accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals, 4 x FE optical signals, and 2
x GE optical/electrical signals, grooms services, performs the system control, processes the
system clock, and provides auxiliary interfaces.
Table 2-47 lists the functions and features of the CXPI.
Table 2-47 Functions and features of the TNC1CXPI

using the CXPI




information.
Provides one orderwire interface. The orderwire interface is
Interface function Working mode of the FE Auto-Negotiation, 10M Full-

electrical port Duplex , 100M Full-Duplex
Working mode of the FE Auto-Negotiation, 100M

optical port Full-Duplex
Working mode of the GE port Auto-Negotiation, 1000M

Full-Duplex

GE port outloop
MAC-layer outloop


at the port


PW OAM Supported
100 ms, or 1s.

MAC addresses
Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported by the FE

electrical interfaces, FE
optical interfaces, and GE
optical interfaces

IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported by the FE

optical interfaces
1588 ACR clock (multicast) Supported by the FE

optical interfaces

The CXPI consists of the auxiliary interface module, control and communication module, service
grooming and processing module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-8 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CXPI.
Figure 2-8 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPI
interface
module signal module
Orderwire interface module on the
board
NMS signal
Orderwire
signal
Control and Management bus Interface
communication module boards
CF card
Management bus
2 x GE signals
Service
Interface
processing boards
4 x FE optical signals module
3.3V Interface
Power 12V boards
System
module power supply
-48V/-60V System
power supply


l Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the external clock/time.The CLK1/
TOD1 port can be used to monitor AC input/output of the EPS30–4815 power supply
system.
NOTE

l Configures and monitors the CXPI and the entire system.



Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the CXPI.


Power Supply Module

l Supplies working power for each module on the CXPI.
2.5.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the CXPI, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.

Figure 2-9 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CXPI.
Figure 2-9 Appearance of the front panel of the CXPI
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CXPI:
NOTE
Above the ETH/OAM and four FE service interfaces, five pairs of LINK and ACT indicators are present,
Buttons
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the CXPI:

on the EF8T, and the LINK indicators on EF8F, all the board indicators on the NE are on.
Interfaces
Table 2-48 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPI.
Table 2-48 Interfaces on the CXPI

Name Type Cable
ETH/OAM RJ-45 10M/100M interface for NM network For details, see Table For details, see 8.7
Cables.
CLK1/ RJ-45 External time/clock input/output For details, see Table For details, see 8.8
TOD1, interface 2-50 and Table Clock Cables.The
CLK2/ CLK1/TOD1 can also be used as a 2-51. monitor cable
PHONE RJ-45 Orderwire interface For details, see Table For details, see 8.7
2-52. Management
Cables.
GE1, GE2 SFP Input/output interface for GE optical/ For details, see Table For details, see
electrical signals 2-53 and Table 8.1.1 Fiber Types
2-54. and 8.6.1
Ethernet Cables.
Types.
FE5 to FE8 RJ-45 Input/output interface for FE electrical For details, see Table For details, see
Cables.


Name Type Cable
NOTE
The FE5 to FE8 interfaces and ETH/OAM interface support auto-adaptation to a straight-through network cable or a crossover
cable.
The PHONE interface is reserved for later use.

7 Unspecified


negative
87654321
of the
CLK

positive
of the
CLK




negative
of the
CLK

positive
of the
CLK



NOTE
1 Unspecified
3 Transmit negative
4 Grounding end

5 Grounding end
6 Transmit positive
7 Receive negative
8 Receive positive
1 to 3 Unspecified
87654321 4 RING
5 TIP
6 to 8 Unspecified

Panel Type
Optical GE1 IN1, LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is

interface GE2 IN2 used, this interface is used as an input interface for
the GE optical signal.

OUT1, used, this interface is used as an output interface for
Electrical GE1, GE2 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals

interface


Panel Type
NOTE
service signals.

Front Panel

OUT2
NOTE


4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
2.5.5 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TNC1CXPI. The TNC1CXPI can be housed in slots 1 and 2.


The technical specifications of the TNC1CXPI cover the interface specifications, board
The interface specifications of the TNC1CXPI are as follows:
l For the specifications of the GE optical interface, see Table 2-59.

Table 2-57 Specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface
FE electrical interface GE electrical interface

(electrical module)
Interface rate Supports interface rates at 10 1000 Mbit/s

Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
RJ-45 electrical Complies with IEEE 802.3.

interface specification
Item Specification

(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)

power (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

(dB)

34060307 34060308 34060309
NOTE
Item Specification

interface interface
type

Item Specification

(0.5 km) (10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km) (10 km) (40 km)

module code. code.
code.

launched
optical
power
(dBm)
Receiver -17 -19 -23 -23 -28 -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3 -9 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9 8.2 6 6
extinction
ratio (dB)
module code. code.
code.

Item Specification
NOTE

code module code
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Item Local Remote

(10 km)

(40 km)
2.6 TNC2CXPI


The functional version of the TNC2CXPI is TNC2.
VUNI side.

The TNC2CXPI accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals, 4 x FE optical signals, and 2
x GE optical/electrical signals, grooms services, performs the system control, processes the
system clock, and provides auxiliary interfaces.
Table 2-62 lists the functions and features of the TNC2CXPI.
Table 2-62 Functions and features of the TNC2CXPI

using the TNC2CXPI



information. The CLK1/TOD1 interface can be used as a
common interface for inputting and outputting the AC power
input monitoring signals for the EPS30–4815 power supply
system.
Provides one alarm input and output interface.
Interface function Working mode of the FE Auto-Negotiation, 10M Full-

electrical port Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex

Working mode of the FE Auto-Negotiation, 100M

optical port Full-Duplex
Working mode of the GE port Auto-Negotiation, 1000M

Full-Duplex

GE1 and GE2 interface outloop
Type of the loopback at the FE3 to FE6, FE9, and FE10:

FE interface PHY-layer inloop
FE3 and FE4: PHY-layer
outloop
All: MAC-layer inloop and
outloop

at the port


PW OAM Supported
100 ms, or 1s.

MAC addresses
Note 1: A GE optical interface with an electrical module does not support synchronous
Ethernet, IEEE 1588V2 or 1588 ACR (multicast).
Note 2: When the FE electrical interfaces on the board work in 10 Mbit/s mode, synchronous
Ethernet, IEEE 1588V2 and 1588 ACR (multicast) are not applicable.
Note 3: FE5 and FE6 electrical interfaces on the board do not support IEEE 1588v2 and 1588
ACR (multicast).


The TNC2CXPI consists of the auxiliary interface module, control and communication module,
service grooming and processing module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-10 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TNC2CXPI.
Figure 2-10 Block diagram for the working principle of the TNC2CXPI
interface
Alarm input and module signal module
module on the
output interface
board
NMS signal
NM commissioning signal
Control and Management bus Interface
communication module boards
CF card
Management bus
2 x GE signals
Service
Interface
processing boards
4 x FE optical signals module
3.3V Interface
Power 12V boards
System
module power supply
-48V/-60V System
power supply

l Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the external clock/time.
l Provides one alarm input/output interface.


l Configures and monitors the TNC2CXPI and the entire system.

l Supports the communication through the orderwire.


Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the TNC2CXPI.
Power Supply Module


l Supplies working power for each module on the TNC2CXPI.
l Supplies working power for the FAN board.
l Supplies working power for the interface board.
2.6.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the CXPI, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.


Figure 2-11 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CXPI.
Figure 2-11 Appearance of the front panel of the CXPI
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CXPI:
l ALM indicator, red, green or orange, which indicates the alarm status
NOTE
Above the ETH/OAM and FE5 to FE8 interfaces, five pairs of LINK and ACT indicators are present, which
indicate the connection status of the Ethernet interface.
Buttons
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the CXPI:
Interfaces
Table 2-63 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPI.
Table 2-63 Interfaces on the CXPI

Name Type Cable
ETH/OAM RJ-45 10M/100M interface for NM network For details, see Table For details, see 8.7
Cables.


Name Type Cable
CLK1/ RJ-45 External time/clock input/output For details, see Table For details, see 8.8
TOD1, interface 2-65 and Table Clock Cables.
CLK2/ CLK1/TOD1 can also be used as a 2-66. The monitor cable
ALMI/ RJ45 3 x alarm inputs and 1 x alarm output For details, see Table For details, see 8.9
ALMO interface 2-67. Alarm Input/
Output Cables.
GE1, GE2 SFP Input/output interface for GE optical/ For details, see Table For details, see
electrical signals 2-68 and Table 8.1.1 Fiber Types
2-69. and 8.6.1
Ethernet Cables.
Types.
FE5 to FE8 RJ-45 Input/output interface for FE electrical For details, see Table For details, see
Cables.
NOTE
The FE5 to FE8 interfaces and ETH/OAM interface support auto-adaptation to a straight-through network cable or a crossover
cable.

7 Unspecified



negative
87654321
of the
CLK

positive
of the
CLK


negative
of the
CLK

positive
of the
CLK





NOTE
1 Unspecified
3 Transmit negative
4 Grounding end
5 Grounding end
6 Transmit positive
7 Receive negative
8 Receive positive
Table 2-67 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO
1 Alarm input 1
3 Alarm input 2
4 Alarm input 3


Panel Type
Optical GE1 IN1, LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is

interface GE2 IN2 used, this interface is used as an input interface for
the GE optical signal.

OUT1, used, this interface is used as an output interface for
Electrical GE1, GE2 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals

interface
NOTE
service signals.


Front Panel

OUT2
NOTE

4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
2.6.5 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TNC2CXPI. The TNC2CXPI can be housed in slots 1 and 2.



The technical specifications of the TNC2CXPI cover the interface specifications, board
The interface specifications of the TNC2CXPI are as follows:
l For the specifications of the GE optical interface, see Table 2-72; Table 2-76 lists the
specifications of the SPF interface with an electrical module.
Item Specification

interface interface
type
(0.5 km) (10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km) (10 km) (40 km)

module code. code.
code.

launched
optical
power
(dBm)

Item Specification
Receiver -17 -19 -23 -23 -28 -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3 -9 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9 8.2 6 6
extinction
ratio (dB)
module code. code.
code.
NOTE

code module code
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Item Local Remote

(10 km)

Item Local Remote

(40 km)
Item Specification

(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)

power (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

(dB)

34060307 34060308 34060309
NOTE
Item Specification

specification

Table 2-77 Specifications of the FE electrical interface
FE electrical interface
Interface rate 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s auto-sensing.
RJ-45 electrical interface Complies with IEEE 802.3 and enterprise

specification regulations.
2.7 EF8T
This section describes the EF8T, which is an interface board with eight FE electrical interfaces,

The functional version of the EF8T is TND1.

The EF8T mainly accesses 8 x FE electrical signals, and processes the services with the
TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN.
Table 2-78 lists the functions and features of the EF8T.
Table 2-78 Functions and features of the EF8T
Basic function Supports eight FE electrical interfaces, accesses 8 x FE electrical

signals, and processes the services with the TNC1CXPA/
TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/
TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN.
Supports the hot swappable function.
Detects the temperature and voltage of the board.


enabled at the first four ports. In addition, this function can be
Interface function Working mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M

Full–Duplex, 100M
Full-Duplex
Type of the loopback at the port PHY-layer inloop

MAC-layer outloop
Automatic loopback release at the Supported

port
Collection of bandwidth utilization Supported

statistics at a port

MAC addresses

multicast)
Note: When working in 10 Mbit/s mode, the FE interfaces do not support the synchronous
Ethernet, IEEE 1588V2 protocol, and 1588 ACR clock (multicast).

The EF8T mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clock
module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-12 shows the block diagram for the functions of the EF8T.

Figure 2-12 Block diagram for the functions of the EF8T

Backplane
8 x FE electrical Management bus

Access and Service Control CXP
signals bus
convergence driver Service bus
module module CXP
Clock signals
Clock signals
Clock Clock signals
CXP
module
Each module on the board 3.3 V -48 V/-60 V System

Power
power supply
1.2 V supply
-48 V/-60 V System
Each module on the board module
power supply
NOTE
As shown in Figure 2-12, the CXP on the backplane indicates the system control, cross-connect and
protocol processing board. This is the same case with the rest of the document.
Access and Convergence Module

l Accesses 8 x FE electrical signals.

l Buffers FE signals to avoid packet loss.
l Provides flow control frames to control the number of packets.
l Processes the IEEE 1588V2 packets.
Control Driver Module

l Detects the system status through the management bus.

– Detects any fault of the system control board.
– Detects whether board is loosened from the slot.
– Detects the voltage and temperature.
l Realizes the hot swappable function of the board.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the board.



Power Supply Module

l Accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies 3.3 V and 1.2 V power for the EF8T.
2.7.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the EF8T, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 2-13 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EF8T.
Figure 2-13 Font panel of the EF8T
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EF8T:
l LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of the port
NOTE
There are eight LINK indicators and eight ACT indicators. One LINK indicator and one ACT indicator
are present above each FE service interface.
Interface
Table 2-79 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the EF8T.

Table 2-79 Types and usage of interfaces on the EF8T
Interface on Interface Usage Pin Correspondin

the Front Type g Cable
Panel
FE1 - FE8 RJ45 Input/output interfaces For details, see For details, see
for FE electrical signals Table 2-80. 8.6.1 Ethernet
Cables.
NOTE
The FE1 to FE8 interfaces support auto-adaptation to a straight-through network cable or a crossover cable.
Table 2-80 Pins of the RJ45 connector of the EF8T

4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
2.7.5 Valid Slots

The EF8T can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4 in the slot area.

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EF8T.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EF8T:
Ethernet interface

The technical specifications of the EF8T include the interface specifications, board dimensions,
Table 2-81 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces of the EF8T.

Table 2-81 Specifications of interfaces on the EF8T
Item Specification
FE electrical signal interface rate Supports interface rates at 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.

specification
Weight (kg): 0.53
2.8 EF8F
This section describes the EF8F, which is an interface board with eight FE optical interfaces,

The functional version of the EF8F is TND1.

The EF8F mainly accesses 8 x FE optical signals, and processes the services with the
Table 2-82 lists the functions and features of the EF8F.
Table 2-82 Functions and features of the EF8F
Basic function Supports eight FE optical interfaces. Accesses 8 x FE optical

signals, and processes the services with the TNC1CXPA/
TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN.

enabled at the first four ports. In addition, this function can
Interface function Working mode 100M Full-Duplex


port MAC-layer outloop

at the port


MAC addresses

multicast)

The EF8F mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clock
Figure 2-14 shows the block diagram for the functions of the EF8F.
Figure 2-14 Block diagram for the functions of the EF8F

Backplane
Service Management bus

8 x FE optical signals Access and CXP
bus Control driver
convergence Service bus
module CXP
module
Clock signals
Clock signals Clock signals

Clock module CXP
3.3 V -48 V/-60 V System power

Each module on the board Power supply
1.2 V supply
Each module on the board -48 V/-60 V System power
module
supply

NOTE
protocol processing board. For OptiX PTN 910, the CXP indicates the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/
TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN.
Access and Convergence Module

l Accesses 8 x FE optical signals.

l Buffers FE signals to avoid packet loss.
l Provides flow control frames to control the number of packets.
l Processes the IEEE 1588V2 packets.
Control Driver Module

l Detects the system status through the management control bus.

– Checks whether any fault occurs on the system control board.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EF8F.

Power Supply Module

l Accesses two - 48 V DC or - 60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies 3.3 V and 1.2 V power for the EF8F.
2.8.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the EF8F, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 2-15 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EF8F.

Figure 2-15 Font panel of the EF8F
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EF8F:
l LINK1 to LINK8 indicators, green, which indicate the connection status of the port
Interfaces
Eight SFP interfaces are present on the EF8F. Table 2-83 lists the types and usage of the
interfaces.
Table 2-83 Interfaces of the EF8F
Interface Interface Usage Corresponding

on the Type Fiber
Front
Panel
IN1 - IN8 LC Input interface for FE optical signals For details, see 8.1.1
Fiber Types.
OUT1 - LC Output interface for FE optical signals
OUT8
NOTE
2.8.5 Valid Slots

The EF8F can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4 in the slot area.

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EF8F.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EF8F:
Ethernet interface


The technical specifications of the EF8F include the interface specifications, board dimensions,
Table 2-84 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the EF8F.
Item Specification

(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)

power (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

(dB)

34060307 34060308 34060309
NOTE
Weight (kg): 0.55
2.9 TND1EG2


The functional version of the TND1EG2 is TND1.
The TND2EG2 and TND1EG2 boards cannot substitute for each other.

The TND1EG2 mainly accesses 2 x GE signals, and processes the services with the TNC1CXPA/
TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN.
Table 2-85 lists the functions and features of the TND1EG2.
Table 2-85 Functions and Features of the TND1EG2
Basic function Supports two GE optical or electrical interfaces. Accesses 2

x GE signals, and processes the services with the
TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/
TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN.

enabled at the two ports. In addition, this function can be

Full-Duplex

port outloop
MAC-layer outloop

at the port


MAC addresses
Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported by the GE optical

interface

IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported by the GE optical

interface
1588 ACR clock (unicast and Supported by the GE optical

multicast) interface

The TND1EG2 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, control driving module,
clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-16 shows the block diagram for the functions of the TND1EG2.
Figure 2-16 Block diagram for the functions of the TND1EG2

Backplane
Management bus
2 x GE signals Interface Service bus Control CXP
conversion driver Service bus
module module CXP
Clock signals
Clock signals
Clock Clock signals
CXP
module
3.3 V -48 V/-60 V System

Each module on the board Power power supply
1.2 V supply
-48 V/-60 V System
power supply
NOTE
Interface Conversion Module

l Accesses 2 x GE services in two directions.

l Supports ESFP optical interfaces and GE colored optical interfaces. Select a proper optical
interface for single-mode or multi-mode transmission over a specified distance.
l Supports the GE electrical interfaces.

Control Driving Module


Clock module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EG2.

Power Supply Module


l Supplies 3.3 V or 1.2 V power for each module on the EG2.
2.9.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TND1EG2, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 2-17 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TND1EG2.
Figure 2-17 Font panel of the TND1EG2
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EG2.

l ACT1 to ACT2 indicators, orange, which indicate the data transceiving status of the port
Interfaces
Two SFP interfaces are present on the TND1EFG2. Table 2-86 and Table 2-87 list the types
and usage of the interfaces on the EG2.
Table 2-86 Types and usage of optical interfaces on the TND1EG2
Interface on the Interf Usage Correspond

Front Panel ace ing Fiber
Type
Optical IN1, LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical For details,

interfac IN2 module is used, this interface is used as an see 8.1.1
e input interface for the GE optical signal. Fiber Types.
When a single-fiber bidirectional optical
module is used, this interface is not used.
OUT1, LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical

OUT2 module is used, this interface is used as an
output interface for the GE optical signal.
module is used, this interface is used as an
input/output interface for the GE optical
signal.
Electric OUT1 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical For details,

al IN1, signals see 8.6.1
interfac OUT2 Ethernet
e IN2 Cables.
NOTE
service signals.

2.9.5 Valid Slots

The TND1EG2 can be housed in any of slots 3 to 4 in the slot area.

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the TND1EG2.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the TND1EG2:
Ethernet interface

The technical specifications of the TND1EG2 include the interface specifications, board
Table 2-88 and Table 2-91 list the specifications of the interfaces on the TND1EG2.
Item Specification

interface interface
type
(0.5 km) (10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km) (10 km) (40 km)

Item Specification

module code. code.
code.

launched
optical
power
(dBm)
Receiver -17 -19 -23 -23 -28 -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3 -9 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9 8.2 6 6
extinction
ratio (dB)
module code. code.
code.
NOTE


code module code
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Item Local Remote

(10 km)

(40 km)
Item Specification

specification
Weight (kg): 0.52
2.10 TND2EG2


The functional version of the TND2EG2 is TND2.
The TND2EG2 and TND1EG2 boards cannot substitute for each other.

The TND2EG2 mainly accesses 2 x GE signals, and processes the services with the TNC1CXPA/
Table 2-92 lists the functions and features of the TND2EG2.
Table 2-92 Functions and Features of the TND2EG2
Basic function Supports two GE optical or electrical interfaces. Accesses 2

x GE signals, and processes the services with the
TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/
TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN.

enabled at the two ports. In addition, this function can be

Full-Duplex

port outloop
MAC-layer outloop

at the port


MAC addresses
Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported by the GE optical

interface

IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported by the GE optical

interface
1588 ACR clock (unicast and Supported by the GE optical

multicast) interface

The TND2EG2 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, control driving module,
clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-18 shows the block diagram for the functions of the TND2EG2.
Figure 2-18 Block diagram for the functions of the TND2EG2

Backplane
Management bus
2 x GE signals Interface Service bus Control CXP
conversion driver Service bus
module module CXP
Clock signals
Clock signals
Clock Clock signals
CXP
module
3.3 V -48 V/-60 V System

Each module on the board Power power supply
1.2 V supply
-48 V/-60 V System
power supply
NOTE
Interface Conversion Module

l Accesses 2 x GE services in two directions.

l Supports ESFP optical interfaces and GE colored optical interfaces. Select a proper optical
interface for single-mode or multi-mode transmission over a specified distance.
l Supports the GE electrical interfaces.

Control Driving Module


Clock module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the TND2EG2.

Power Supply Module


l Supplies working power for each module on the TND2EG2.
2.10.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TND2EG2, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 2-19 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TND2EG2.
Figure 2-19 Font panel of the TND2EG2
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TND2EG2.

l ACT1 to ACT2 indicators, orange, which indicate the data transceiving status of the port
Interfaces
Two SFP interfaces are present on the EFG2. Table 2-93 and Table 2-94 list the types and usage
of the interfaces on the TND2EG2.
Table 2-93 Types and usage of optical interfaces on the TND2EG2
Interface on the Interf Usage Correspond

Front Panel ace ing Fiber
Type
Optical IN1, LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical For details,

interfac IN2 module is used, this interface is used as an see 8.1.1
e input interface for the GE optical signal. Fiber Types.
module is used, this interface is not used.
OUT1, LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical

OUT2 module is used, this interface is used as an
output interface for the GE optical signal.
module is used, this interface is used as an
input/output interface for the GE optical
signal.
Electric OUT1 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical For details,

al IN1, signals see 8.6.1
interfac OUT2 Ethernet
e IN2 Cables.
NOTE
service signals.

2.10.5 Valid Slots

The TND2EG2 can be housed in any of slots 3 to 4 in the slot area.

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the TND2EG2.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the TND2EG2:
Ethernet interface

The technical specifications of the TND2EG2 include the interface specifications, board
Table 2-95 and Table 2-98 list the specifications of the interfaces on the TND2EG2.
Item Specification

interface interface
type
(0.5 km) (10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km) (10 km) (40 km)

Item Specification

module code. code.
code.

launched
optical
power
(dBm)
Receiver -17 -19 -23 -23 -28 -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3 -9 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9 8.2 6 6
extinction
ratio (dB)
module code. code.
code.
NOTE


code module code
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Item Local Remote

(10 km)

(40 km)
Item Specification

specification
Weight (kg): 0.52
2.11 EG4F
This section describes the EG4F, a four-channel GE optical interface board, in terms of the
specifications.


The function version of the EG4F is TND1.

The TND1EG4F provides four GE service interfaces (two groups). The TND1EG4F is used
with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI to transmit, receive,
and process four channels of FE/GE optical services.
Table 2-99 lists the functions and features of the TND1EG4F.
Table 2-99 Functions and features of the TND1EG4F
Function and Description

Feature
Basic functions The following four SFP interfaces (two groups) are present on the front
panel of the EG4F:
l Interface group 1: OUT1 IN1 and OUT2 IN2
l Interface group 2: OUT3 IN3 and OUT4 IN4
The SFP interface can function as either an optical interface or an
electrical interface. When function as an optical interface, it can be
configured to work at a rate of 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s.
Service access capability:

The TND1EG4F can transmit/receive 2 Gbit/s services and each group
of interfaces can transmit/receive 1 Gbit/s services. In addition, the two
interfaces in each group share bandwidth.
The TND1EG4F is hot pluggable.
The TND1EG4F supports the temperature and voltage detection

function.
DCN The TND1EG4F supports the inband DCN function, which can be
manually enabled or disabled. By default, the four interfaces on the
EG4F are enabled with the DCN function.
Interface functions Working mode Auto-Negotiation, 100M Full–

Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex
Loopback types PHY-layer inloop

MAC-layer outloop
Bandwidth utilization statistics Supported


Feature
MAC address black Supported

and white lists
Clocks Synchronous Ethernet Supported
Note: A GE optical interface with an electrical module does not support synchronous Ethernet,
IEEE 1588v2 or 1588 ACR (multicast).

The TND1EG4F consists of the service access module, service processing module, management
module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-20 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TND1EG4F.
Figure 2-20 Block diagram for the working principle of the TND1EG4F
Backplane
Service signals Service Service signals

4 x GE signals Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus
Management bus Clock signals
Management Clock signals

Clock module CXP
module
Management bus
CXP
3.3 V -48 V/-60 V System power

3.0 V
Power supply supply
Each module on the board 2.5 V
module -48 V/-60 V
1.2 V System power
supply
NOTE
As shown in Figure 2-20, the backplane-side CXP refers to the control, cross-connect, and protocol
processing board for the equipment. To be specific, the backplane-side CXP for the OptiX PTN 910 is the
TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TN1CXPH/TNC1CXPI.
Transmit Direction
The service packets from the system-control board are sent to the service processing module
through the backplane-side interface of the TND1EG4F. The service processing module

identifies the destination interfaces for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then,
the service processing module sends the processed packets to the service access module, where
coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/O conversion are performed. Finally, the
service access module outputs the packets through the GE interfaces on the front panel.
Receive Direction
The GE interfaces on the front panel receive GE service signals. Then, the service access module
performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding on the services, and
then sends the services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers
the service packets, schedules the packets based on the service access capability of the
TND1EG4F and the access bandwidth setting at each interface, and finally outputs the packets
through the backplane-side interface.
Service Access Module

l In the receive direction, this module receives the GE services from the interfaces on the
front panel, performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding, and
then sends the services to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the service
processing module, performs coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/O
conversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE interfaces on the
front panel.
Service Processing Module

l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from the
interface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfaces
based on the access capability of the EG4F and the access bandwidth settings at these
interfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the system-control
board, identifies the destination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the
packets based on the access capability of the EG4F and the access bandwidth setting at
each interface. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module.
l This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock.
l This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588v2 packets.
Management Module
This module is used with the system-control board to manage and control each module on the
EG4F.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EG4F.

l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and SSM protocols.

l Supports the IEEE 1588v2 protocol.
Power Supply Module

This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the
TND1EG4F.
l 3.3 V
l 3.0 V
l 2.5 V
l 1.2 V
2.11.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TND1EG4F, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 2-21 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TND1EG4F.
Figure 2-21 Appearance of the front panel of the TND1EG4F
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TND1EG4F:
l L/A1 to L/A4 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection status and
data transmit/receive status
For details on indications of the indicators, see B Indicators.
Interfaces
There are four SFP interfaces on the TND1EG4F. Table 2-100 lists the types and usage of the
interfaces.

Table 2-100 Types and usage of interfaces on the TND1EG4F
Interface on the Front Interface Usage Correspo

Panel Type nding
Cable
Optical IN1-IN4 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional For details,

interfaces optical module is used, this see 8.1.1
(GE interface is used as an input Fiber
optical interface for the GE optical signal. Types.
module) When a single-fiber bidirectional
optical module is used, this
interface is not used.
OUT1- LC When a two-fiber bidirectional

OUT4 optical module is used, this
interface is used as an output
When a single-fiber bidirectional
optical module is used, this
interface is used as an input/output
Optical IN1-IN4 LC Input interface for FE optical For details,

interfaces signals see 8.1.1
(FE Fiber
OUT1- LC Output interface for FE optical Types.
optical
OUT4 signals
module)
NOTE
2.11.5 Valid Slots

The TND1EG4F can be housed in any of slots 3 and 4.

You can use the U2000 to set the parameter for the TND1EG4F.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the TND1EG4F:
Ethernet interface
For details on the parameter, see D Board Configuration Parameters.

The technical specifications of the TND1EG4F include the interface specifications,board
dimensions, and weight.
Table 2-101 lists the specifications of the GE interfaces on the TND1EG4F.

Table 2-104 lists the specifications of the FE interfaces on the TND1EG4F.
Item Specification

interface interface
type
(0.5 km) (10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km) (10 km) (40 km)

module code. code.
code.

launched
optical
power
(dBm)
Receiver -17 -19 -23 -23 -28 -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3 -9 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9 8.2 6 6
extinction
ratio (dB)

Item Specification
module code. code.
code.
NOTE

code module code
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Item Local Remote

(10 km)

(40 km)

Item Specification

(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)

power (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

(dB)

34060307 34060308 34060309
NOTE

Weight (kg): 0.50
2.12 TND1ML1/TND1ML1A
This section describes the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A, which is a 16 x E1 electrical interface board,
NOTE
The TND1ML1 and TND1ML1A have the same functions and features except for the matched impedance
(ML1: 75 ohms E1; ML1A: 120 ohms E1).

The functional version of the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A is TND1.
The ML1 has two function versions, that is, TND1 and TND2. Table 2-105 lists the differences
between these two versions.

Table 2-105 Differences between the two function versions of the ML1
Function Difference
TND1ML1/TND1ML1A TND2ML1A/
TND2ML1B
Matching impedance at an TND1ML1: 75 ohms TND2ML1A: 75 ohms

interface TND1ML1A: 120 ohms TND2ML1B: 120 ohms
ATM scheduling mode Scheduling by service type Scheduling by connection

Scheduling by CBR, UBR,
UBR+, rt-VBR, or nrt-VBR
connection
ML-PPP scheduling Scheduling with four Scheduling with eight

priorities priorities
Number of timeslots 3-30 1-31

supported by a 64k channel
Note: The TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B supports the board version replacement function. After
the TND1ML1/ML1A is replaced with the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B, and the logical board
on the NMS is upgraded as the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B, the original services are retained.
For details, see Replacing the Interface Boards.

The TND1ML1 is a 75-ohm E1 board and the TND1ML1A is a 120-ohm E1 board. The
TND1ML1/TND1ML1A can access a maximum of 16 x E1 signals, supports flexible
configuration of different services on each port, and is hot swappable.
Table 2-106 lists functions and features of the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A.
Table 2-106 Functions and features of the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A
Function and Feature Remarks
Basic functions Accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals and supports the ATM
E1, IMA, CES, and ML-PPP protocols.
DCN Supports the in-band DCN. By default, the DCN function is

enabled at the first and the sixteenth E1 ports. In addition, this
function can be disabled or enabled manually.
Interface functions Supports collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at an

IMA/ML-PPP port.



groups
links or 64 kbit/s level serial

IMA group members.
Supported traffic types CBR

UBR
UBR+
rt-VBR
nrt-VBR


services
Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-

to-1 (N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.


and NNI side

services

SAToP

Supported clock modes Retiming mode



PPP groups

group


The TND1ML1/TND1ML1A mainly consists of the control module, line-side processing
module, system-side processing module, backplane interface module, clock module, and power
supply module.
Figure 2-22shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A.
Figure 2-22 Block diagram for the working principle of the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A
Backplane
1.2 V -48 V/-60 V

1.26 V Power supply -48 V/-60 V
To each module 2.5 V module 3.3 V
3.3 V
Service Service
16 x E1 signals Line-side bus bus Backplane Service bus
System-side
processing interface CXP
processing module
module module
Management bus
Serial
management bus
Management bus Control module CXP

To each module Clock module CXP

NOTE
In Transmit Direction
The TND1ML1/TND1ML1A first distributes the signals in Ethernet packets from the backplane
to different protocol processing chips according to the service types. The system-side processing
module decapsulates the concatenated services and buffers the services in queues. Then, this
module schedules the egress queues according to the service types, processes and converts the
services, and finally sends the services to the line-side processing module. The line-side
processing module performs coding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and line driving for the services,
and finally sends the services to E1 interfaces.
In Receive Direction
The line processing module performs impedance match, signal equalization, signal level
conversion, clock data recovery, dejitter, and decoding for the accessed E1 signals. Then, the
signals are sent into the system-side processing module, which frames the signals, encapsulates
the IMA, CES, and ML-PPP services in PWE3, and schedules PWs. Finally, this module sends
the signals in Ethernet packets to the backplane interface module.
Line-Side Processing Module

In the receive channel, this module performs impedance match, signal equalization, electrical
level conversion, clock data recovery, dejitter, and decoding to signals. In the transmit channel,
this module performs encoding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and line driving to signals.
System-Side Processing Module

This module frames 16 x E1 signals, runs the CES, IMA, and ML-PPP protocols, and performs
PWE3 encapsulation.
Backplane Interface Module

The service bus receives or transmits service signals.
Control Module
This module controls the reading and writing on the chip, resets the chip, and detects faults in
the chip.When used with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/
TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN, this module controls the board.
Clock Module
This module provides various clock signals for the board to operate normally, detects clocks,
and selects the line recovery clock.

Power Supply Module

This module converts the -48 V DC/-60 V DC voltage to DC voltages required by each module
on the board. In addition, this module supplies 3.3 V power to the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A
through the backplane.
2.12.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 2-23 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TND1ML1.
Figure 2-23 Front panel of the TND1ML1
Figure 2-24 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TND1ML1A.
Figure 2-24 Front panel of the TND1ML1A
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A:
Interfaces
There is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A. Table
2-107 lists the type and usage of the interface. For cables corresponding to the interfaces, see
8.6.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and 8.6.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables.

Table 2-107 Type and usage of the interface on the front panel of the ML1
Interface Interface Usage

on the Type
Front TND1ML1 TND1ML1A
Panel
1 - 16 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is used to 120-ohm interface, which is

transmit or receive the first to used to transmit or receive the
sixteenth channels of E1 services. first to sixteenth channels of
E1 services.
Table 2-108 lists the pins of the Anea 96 interface.
1 Rx1 25 Tx1
2 26
3 Rx2 27 Tx2
4 28
5 Rx3 29 Tx3
6 30
7 Rx4 31 Tx4
8 32
9 Rx5 33 Tx5
10 34
11 Rx6 35 Tx6
12 36
13 Rx7 37 Tx7
14 38
15 Rx8 39 Tx8
16 40
17 Rx9 41 Tx9
18 42
19 R x 10 43 T x 10

20 44
21 R x 11 45 T x 11
22 46
23 R x 12 47 T x 12
24 48
49 R x 13 73 T x 13
50 74
51 R x 14 75 T x 14
52 76
53 R x 15 77 T x 15
54 78
55 R x 16 79 T x 16
56 80
2.12.5 Valid Slots

The TND1ML1/TND1ML1A can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4.

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A:
l PDH interface
l Spare timeslot recovery value

The technical specifications of the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A include the interface specifications,
Table 2-109 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A.

Table 2-109 Specifications of the interfaces on the TND1ML1/TND1ML1A
Interface impedance 75 ohms (TND1ML1)

120 ohms (TND1ML1A)
Interface code HDB3
Pulse waveform at the output Complies with ITU-T G.703

interface

interface at the point with a
frequency of 1024 kHz (dB)
Anti-interference capability of the Complies with ITU-T G.703

input interface
Weight (kg): 0.56
2.13 TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B
This section describes the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B, a 16-channel E1 electrical interface board,
in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and
NOTE
The mapping impedance of an interface on the TND2ML1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an
interface on the TND2ML1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and
features of the TND2ML1A and TND2ML1B are the same.

The function version of the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B is TND2.
The ML1 has two function versions, that is, TND1 and TND2. Table 2-110 lists the differences
between these two versions.

Table 2-110 Differences between the two function versions of the ML1
Function Difference
TND1ML1/TND1ML1A TND2ML1A/
TND2ML1B
Matching impedance at an TND1ML1: 75 ohms TND2ML1A: 75 ohms

interface TND1ML1A: 120 ohms TND2ML1B: 120 ohms
ATM scheduling mode Scheduling by service type Scheduling by connection

Scheduling by CBR, UBR,
UBR+, rt-VBR, or nrt-VBR
connection
ML-PPP scheduling Scheduling with four Scheduling with eight

priorities priorities
Number of timeslots 3-30 1-31

supported by a 64k channel
Note: The TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B supports the board version replacement function. After
the TND1ML1/ML1A is replaced with the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B, and the logical board
on the NMS is upgraded as the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B, the original services are retained.
For details, see Replacing the Interface Boards.

The TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B is an E1 interface board. The TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B must
be used with the system control board to access and process 16 channels of E1 services. Services
at interfaces on the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B can be flexibly configured, and protocols such
as ATM E1, IMA, CES, and ML-PPP are supported.
Table 2-111 lists the functions and features of the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B.
Table 2-111 Functions and features of the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B
Basic functions Accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals and supports the ATM E1,
IMA, CES, and ML-PPP protocols.

enabled at the first and the sixteenth E1 ports. In addition, this
Interface functions Supports collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at an IMA/

ML-PPP port.

PRBS Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1

port in the receive/transmit direction.

groups
Maximum number of E1 links 16

or 64 kbit/s level serial ports in
each IMA group
Dynamically enables or disables the IMA group, restarts the IMA

group protocol, and dynamically adds or deletes the IMA group
members.

UBR
UBR+
rt-VBR
nrt-VBR


services
Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1

(N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.
Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation and

non-concatenation modes. The number of PW connections that
support the cell concatenation is 64, and the maximum number of
concatenated cells is 31.
ATM OAM on the UNI side and Supports the CC test.

NNI side

services

SAToP
Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle 64

kbit/s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the
CESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth.

The jitter compensation buffer time of the CES service can be set.
The jitter buffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the step
value is 0.125 ms.
encapsulation buffer time ranges from 0.25 ms to 3 ms, and the
step value is 0.125 ms.
ML-PPP Number of supported ML-PPP 7

groups

group
Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI interface

to access IP packets of the L3VPN services.

The TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B mainly consists of the service access module, service processing
module, management module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-25 shows the functional block diagram of the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B.
Figure 2-25 Functional block diagram of the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B

Backplane
16 x E1 Service signal Service Service signal

Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus
Line clocks Management Management bus

CXP
module
-48V/-60V System
3.3V Power
Clock . . power supply
. .
supply
module . .
-48V/-60V
1V module System
power supply
System clocks
Line clocks CXP
CXP
NOTE

Transmit Direction
The service signals from the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/
TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN are sent to the service processing module. The service
processing module performs PWE3 decapsulation and PW scheduling for the service signals,
processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols, performs
the E1 framing function, and sends the service signals to the service access module. The service
access module performs encoding and line drive for the signals and outputs the signals through
the backplane-side interfaces.
Receive Direction
The board accesses service signals through the backplane-side interfaces, and then the signals
are sent to the service access module. The service access module performs interference isolation,
lightning-proof, impedance matching, level conversion, signal balancing, decoding, and then
sends the processed signals to the service processing module. The service processing module
performs E1 framing, processes service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP
protocols, implements PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends the signals to the
TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN
through the backplane-side interfaces.

l In the receive direction, this module isolates common mode interference, protects circuits
against transient failures, matches the impedance in the receive direction with the internal
impedance, and performs level conversion, balancing, and decoding for the service signals.
Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the service
processing module, encodes the signals, drives the line, and outputs the service signals
l This module recovers the line clock.

l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the service access module
and performs E1 framing. This module also identifies protocol types of the service signals,
processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols (for
example, addition and deletion of IMA group members, VP/VC switching and
concatenation of ATM cells, vacant slot compression of CES services, and setup of ML-
PPP groups). Then, this module performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, Finally,
this module converts the processed signals to high-rate signals, and then sends the signals
to the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/
TNC2CXPN through the backplane-side interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the high-rate signals from the TNC1CXPA/
TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN through
the backplane-side interfaces and recovers low-rate service signals. Then, this module
performs PWE3 decapsulation, identifies different protocols and processes the service

signals, and completes E1 framing. Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the
service access module.
Management Module
This module manages and controls each module on the board.
Clock Module
l When used with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/

TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN, processes the recovered line clock.
Power Supply Module

This module converts the input DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each module
on the board.
2.13.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearances of the Front Panel

Figure 2-26 shows the appearances of the front panel of the TND2ML1A and TND2ML1B.
Figure 2-26 Front panels of the TND2ML1A and the TND2ML1B
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B:

Interfaces
There is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B. Table
2-112 lists the type and usage of the interfaces. 8.6.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and 8.6.3 120-
Ohm 16 x E1 Cables list the cables corresponding to the interfaces.
Table 2-112 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the TND2ML1A/
TND2ML1B
Interface Interface Usage

on the Type
Front TND2ML1A TND2ML1B
Panel
1 to 16 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is used 120-ohm interface, which is

to transmit or receive the first to used to transmit or receive the
sixteenth channels of E1 first to sixteenth channels of E1
services. services.
1 Rx1 25 Tx1
2 26
3 Rx2 27 Tx2
4 28
5 Rx3 29 Tx3
6 30
7 Rx4 31 Tx4
8 32
9 Rx5 33 Tx5
10 34
11 Rx6 35 Tx6
12 36
13 Rx7 37 Tx7
14 38
15 Rx8 39 Tx8

16 40
17 Rx9 41 Tx9
18 42
19 R x 10 43 T x 10
20 44
21 R x 11 45 T x 11
22 46
23 R x 12 47 T x 12
24 48
49 R x 13 73 T x 13
50 74
51 R x 14 75 T x 14
52 76
53 R x 15 77 T x 15
54 78
55 R x 16 79 T x 16
56 80
2.13.5 Valid Slots

The TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4.

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B:
l PDH interface
l PRBS Test

The technical specifications of the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B include the interface
specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Table 2-114 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B.
Table 2-114 Specifications of the interfaces on the TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B
Interface impedance 75 ohms (TND2ML1A)

120 ohms (TND2ML1B)
Interface code HDB3
Attenuation tolerance of the input interface at 0 to 6

the point with a frequency of 1024 kHz (dB)

interface

Weight (kg): 0.44
2.14 TND1MD1A/TND1MD1B
This section describes the MD1A/MD1B, a 32-channel E1 electrical interface board, in terms
specifications.
NOTE
The mapping impedance of an interface on the MD1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an interface
on the MD1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and features of the
MD1A and MD1B are the same.

The functional version of the MD1A/MD1B is TND1.

The MD1A/MD1B is an E1 interface board. The MD1A/MD1B must be used with the system
control board to access and process 32 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on the
MD1A/MD1B can be flexibly configured, and protocols such as ATM E1, IMA, CES, and ML-
PPP are supported.

Table 2-115 lists the functions and features of the MD1A/MD1B.
Table 2-115 Functions and features of the MD1A/MD1B
Basic functions Accesses and processes 32 x E1 signals and supports the ATM E1,
IMA, CES, and ML-PPP protocols.

enabled at the first and the thirty-second E1 ports. In addition, this
Interface functions Supports collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at an IMA/

ML-PPP port.
PRBS Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1

port in the receive/transmit direction.

groups
Maximum number of E1 links 16a

or 64 kbit/s level serial ports in
each IMA group

members.

UBR
UBR+
rt-VBR
nrt-VBR


services
Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1

(N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.
Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation and

non-concatenation modes. The number of PW connections that
support the cell concatenation is 64, and the maximum number of
concatenated cells is 31.

ATM OAM on the UNI side and Supports the CC test.

NNI side

services

SAToP
Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle 64

kbit/s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the
CESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth.
The jitter compensation buffer time of the CES service can be set.
The jitter buffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the step
value is 0.125 ms.
encapsulation buffer time ranges from 0.25 ms to 3 ms, and the step
value is 0.125 ms.
ML-PPP Number of supported ML-PPP 7

groups
Maximum number of links 16b

group
Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI interface

to access IP packets of the L3VPN services.
NOTE
a: In the case of the MD1A/MD1B, the links and 64 kbit/s timeslots corresponding to the former 16 and
latter 16 E1 ports cannot be bundled to an IMA group. If the former 16 E1 ports and the latter 16 E1 ports
are configured in two different IMA groups, an ATM aggregation service from the two IMA groups to a
PW is not allowed.
a: In the case of the MD1A/MD1B, the links corresponding to the former 16 and latter 16 E1 ports cannot
be bundled to an ML-PPP group.

The MD1A/MD1B mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module,
management module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-27 shows the functional block diagram of the MD1A/MD1B.

Figure 2-27 Functional block diagram of the MD1A/MD1B

Backplane
32 x E1 Service signal Service Service signal

Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus
Line clocks Management Management bus

CXP
module
-48V/-60V System power

3.3V Power
Clock . . supply
. .
supply
module . .
-48V/-60V
1V module System power
supply
System clocks
Line clocks CXP
CXP
NOTE
Transmit Direction
The service signals from the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/
TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN are sent to the service processing module. The service
processing module performs PWE3 decapsulation and PW scheduling for the service signals,
processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols, performs
the E1 framing function, and sends the service signals to the service access module. The service
access module performs encoding and line drive for the signals and outputs the signals through
the backplane-side interfaces.
Receive Direction
The board accesses service signals through the backplane-side interfaces, and then the signals
are sent to the service access module. The service access module performs interference isolation,
lightning-proof, impedance matching, level conversion, signal balancing, decoding, and then
sends the processed signals to the service processing module. The service processing module
performs E1 framing, processes service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP
protocols, implements PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends the signals to the
TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN

l In the receive direction, this module isolates common mode interference, protects circuits
against transient failures, matches the impedance in the receive direction with the internal

impedance, and performs level conversion, balancing, and decoding for the service signals.
Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the service
processing module, encodes the signals, drives the line, and outputs the service signals
l This module recovers the line clock.

l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the service access module
and performs E1 framing. This module also identifies protocol types of the service signals,
processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols (for
example, addition and deletion of IMA group members, VP/VC switching and
concatenation of ATM cells, vacant slot compression of CES services, and setup of ML-
PPP groups). Then, this module performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, Finally,
this module converts the processed signals to high-rate signals, and then sends the signals
to the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/
TNC2CXPN through the backplane-side interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the high-rate signals from the TNC1CXPA/
TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN through
the backplane-side interfaces and recovers low-rate service signals. Then, this module
performs PWE3 decapsulation, identifies different protocols and processes the service
signals, and completes E1 framing. Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the
service access module.
Management Module
This module manages and controls each module on the board.
Clock Module
l When used with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/

TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN, processes the recovered line clock.
Power Supply Module

This module converts the input DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each module
on the board.
2.14.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearances of the Front Panel

Figure 2-28 shows the appearances of the front panel of the MD1A and the MD1B.

Figure 2-28 Front panels of the MD1A and the MD1B
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B:
Interfaces
There are two Anea 96 interfaces on the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B. Table 2-116 lists the
type and usage of the interfaces. 8.6.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and 8.6.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1
Cables list the cables corresponding to the interfaces.
Table 2-116 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B
Interfac Interfac Usage

e on the e Type
Front MD1A MD1B
Panel
1 to 16 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is used 120-ohm interface, which is used

to transmit or receive the first to to transmit or receive the first to
sixteenth channels of E1 sixteenth channels of E1
services. services.
17 to 32 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is used 120-ohm interface, which is used

to transmit or receive the to transmit or receive the
seventeenth to thirty-second seventeenth to thirty-second
channels of E1 services. channels of E1 services.

1 Rx1 25 Tx1
2 26
3 Rx2 27 Tx2
4 28
5 Rx3 29 Tx3
6 30
7 Rx4 31 Tx4
8 32
9 Rx5 33 Tx5
10 34
11 Rx6 35 Tx6
12 36
13 Rx7 37 Tx7
14 38
15 Rx8 39 Tx8
16 40
17 Rx9 41 Tx9
18 42
19 R x 10 43 T x 10
20 44
21 R x 11 45 T x 11
22 46
23 R x 12 47 T x 12
24 48
49 R x 13 73 T x 13
50 74
51 R x 14 75 T x 14
52 76
53 R x 15 77 T x 15

54 78
55 R x 16 79 T x 16
56 80
2.14.5 Valid Slots

The MD1A/MD1B can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4.

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the MD1A/MD1B.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the MD1A/MD1B:
l PDH interface
l PRBS Test

The technical specifications of the MD1A/MD1B include the interface specifications,
Table 2-118 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the MD1A/MD1B.
Table 2-118 Specifications of the interfaces on the MD1A/MD1B
Interface impedance 75 ohms (MD1A)

120 ohms (MD1B)
Interface code HDB3
Pulse waveform at the output Complies with ITU-T G.703

interface

interface at the point with a
frequency of 1024 kHz (dB)
Anti-interference capability of the Complies with ITU-T G.703

input interface

Weight (kg): 0.49
2.15 CD1
This section describes the CD1, which is a 1 x channelized STM-1 service processing board, in
terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical
specifications.

The functional version of the CD1 is TND1.

The CD1 accesses 1 x channelized STM-1 services, and supports the intra-board LMSP
protection. When used with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/
TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN, the CD1 processes the service signals. The CD1 supports
the IMA, CES, and ML-PPP protocols, and the service type can be flexibly configured.
Table 2-119 lists functions and features of the CD1.
Table 2-119 Functions and features of the CD1
Function and Remarks

Feature
Basic function Service interfaces on the Supports two channelized STM-1

front panel optical interfacesa.
DCN All the VC-12 timeslots of each CD1 interface support the DCN
function. By default, the DCN function of only the first, seventeenth,
thirty-third, and forty-ninth VC-12 timeslots of each optical interface
can be enabled.
Manually enables or disables the DCN function of the VC-12
timeslots of the optical interface on the CD1.
Fractional E1 Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kibt/s level.
Interface function Automatic shutdown Supported

function of the laser at the
port


Feature
Type of the loopback at the Inloop at an STM-1 port

port Outloop at an STM-1 port
Inloop in a VC-12 channel
Outloop in a VC-12 channel

at the port

IMA/ML-PPP port
PRBS Supports the PRBS function in unframed mode of a VC-12 channel

in the receive/transmit direction.
ATM/IMA Number of supported ATM 32

E1 services
Number of supported IMA 32

groups
Maximum number of 63
VC-12 timeslots or serial

members.

UBR
UBR+
rt-VBR
nrt-VBR


services
Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1 (N

≤32) or 1-to-1 format.
Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation and non-

concatenation modes. The number of PW connections that support the
cell concatenation is 64, and the maximum number of concatenated
cells is 31.


Feature
ATM OAM on the UNI Supports the CC test

sideand NNI side

servicesb

SAToP
Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle 64 kbit/

s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the CESoPSN
mode to save the transmission bandwidth.

Self-adaptation mode
The jitter compensation buffer time of the CES service can be set. The
jitter buffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the step value
is 0.125 ms.
encapsulation buffer time ranges from 0.25 ms to 3 ms, and the step
value is 0.125 ms.

PPP groups

group
Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI interface to

access IP packets of the L3VPN services.
LMSP protection Supports the 1+1 LMSP and 1:1 LMSP protection schemes.
Extraction and Supported

insertion of the S1
byte

NOTE
a: The second channelized STM-1 interface on the front panel cannot be used to carry services, and it can
be used for only the intra-board LMSP protection.
b: The CD1 board does not support the intra-board CES local services.


The CD1 consists of the SDH processing module, line processing module, data processing
module, management module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-29 shows the block diagram for working principle of the CD1.
Figure 2-29 Block diagram for the working principle of the CD1
Channelized Backplane
STM-1
SDH Service Line Service Data Service
Stand-by
processing signal processing signal processing signal
channelized CXP
STM-1 module module module
Management
Management bus Management bus
bus
Management Management bus

CXP
module
Line clocks
Clock CXP
Line clocks
module System clocks
CXP
3.3V -48V/-60V System

. . Power
. . power supply
supply -48V/-60V
. . System
1.2V module
power supply
NOTE
Receive Direction
In the receive direction, the SDH processing module accesses 1 x channelized STM-1 services
through the interface on the front panel. This module decapsulates the VC-12 timeslots from the
STM-1 signals, recovers the E1 signals, processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and alarm
signals, and sends the processed signals to the line processing module. Then, the line processing
module rearranges the E1 frames, processes the rearranged signals according to the service type,
and sends the signals to the data processing module for PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling.
Finally, the signals are sent to the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/
TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN through the interface on the backplane.
Transmit Direction
In the transmit direction, the data processing module receives the signals from the TNC1CXPA/
TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN, identifies the
signals, performs the PWE3 decapsulation, and then sends the signals to the line processing
module. The line processing module processes various signals, schedules queues, and sends the
processed signals to the SDH processing module. The SDH processing module maps the E1
signals to the VC-12 timeslots, multiplexes the VC-12 timeslots to the STM-1 signals, adds the

overhead bytes and pointers, processes the alarm signals, and sends out the STM-1 signals
through the interface on the front panel.
SDH Processing Module

l In the receive direction, this module accesses 1 x channelized STM-1 signals, decapsulates
the VC-12 timeslots from the STM-1 signals, obtains the E1 signals by demapping the
VC-12 timeslots, and processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and alarm signals.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the E1 signals from the line processing
module, maps the signals to the VC-12 timeslots, multiplexes the VC-12 timeslots to
STM-1 signals, adds the overhead bytes and pointers, processes the alarm signals, and sends
out the 1 x channelized STM-1 signals through the interface on the backplane.
l When the service fails, this module realizes the LMSP protection. Thus, the service is
switched.
l This module extracts and recovers the line clocks.
Line Processing Module

l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the SDH processing module,
rearranges the frames of the E1 signals, performs processing for various services such as
setup and deletion of the IMA link, creation of the ML-PPP group, extraction of protocol
packets in the ML-PPP services, and suppression of timeslots of the CES services. Then,
the processed signals are sent to the data processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the signals from the data processing module,
processes various services, and sends the processed signals to the SDH processing module.
Data Processing Module

l In the receive direction, this module obtains the corresponding PW channel information of
each E1 service, performs the PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends the
processed signals to the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/
TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN through the interface on the backplane.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the signals from the TNC1CXPA/
TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN, identifies
different service types, and performs the PWE3 decapsulation and service scheduling.
l In the case of the ATM E1 or IMA services, this module performs the VP/VC switching
for the ATM cells, and processes the concatenated cells during the PWE3 encapsulation or
decapsulation.
Management Module
When used with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/
TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN, this module manages and controls each module on the CD1.

Clock Module
l Processes the line clocks.

l Accesses and processes the system clock from the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/
TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN, and provides the working clock to
each module on the CD1.
l Supports the SSM protocol.
Power Supply Module

l Accesses two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies the working power for each module on the CD1.
2.15.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the CD1, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 2-30 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CD1.
Figure 2-30 Appearance of the front panel of the CD1
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CD1:
l LOS1 and LOS2 indicators, red or green, which indicate the port status
Interfaces
Table 2-120 lists the amount, types, and usage of the interfaces on the CD1.

Table 2-120 Interfaces on the CD1
Interface on Interface Usage Corresponding

the Front Type Fiber
Panel
IN1 to IN2 LC Input interface for STM-1 optical For details, see
signals 8.1.1 Fiber Types.
OUT1 to LC Output interface for STM-1 optical

OUT2 signals
NOTE
2.15.5 Valid Slots

The CD1 can be housed in any of the two slots, that is, slots 3 and 4.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the CD1.
You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the CD1.
l J0
l J1
l J2
l C2
l V5
l SDH interface
l Automatic laser shutdown
l Spare timeslot recovery value

The technical specifications of the CD1 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,
Table 2-121 lists the specifications of interfaces on the CD1.
Table 2-121 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface
Item Specification

Item Specification
S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)

power (dBm)

(dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -10 -10

(dB)

34060307 34060308 34060309
NOTE

2.16 ADS2A/ADS2B
This section describes the ADS2A/ADS2B, a 2-channel ADSL service interface board, in terms
specifications.
NOTE
The ADS2A and ADS2B have the same functions, except for supporting different modes. The ADS2A
supports the Annex A mode and the ADS2B supports the Annex B mode. The following refers the ADS2A
and ADS2B uniformly as ADS2.

The functional version of the ADS2 is TND1.

Used with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/
TNC2CXPN, the ADS2 can process the asymmetrical digital subscriber line (ADSL) services.

Table 2-122 lists the functions and features of the ADS2.
Table 2-122 Functions and Features of the ADS2
Basic Function Provides two ADSL interfaces and accesses 2 x ADSL signals.
Supports PVC pair setting for ports (eight PVC for each port).
Application scenario The ADS2 is applied in the offload scenario. On the access side,
the OptiX PTN 910 performs ATM PWE3 emulation for the
HSDPA service flow. Then, the emulated service is
encapsulated in the tunnel required by the WMS network.
Finally, the ADS2 performs ATM adaptation for the service.
When entering the ADSL network, the encapsulated service is
transported to the opposite equipment, then decapsulated, and
finally transported to the RNC node.
Compliant norms ITU-T G.994
ITU-T G.992.1 (G.dmt), Annex A, B
ITU-T G.992.2 (G.lite), Annex A, B
ANSI T1.413
ITU-T G.992.3 (ADSL2), Annex A, B
ITU-T G.992.5 (ADSL2+), Annex A, B

The ADS2 mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting module, clock
Figure 2-31 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the ADS2.

Figure 2-31 Block diagram for the working principle of the ADS2
Backplane

To each module Clock module CXP
Service Service
Parallel/serial bus
bus converting CXP
Logic module
Two-channel ADSL Management
transceiver control Serial management bus
ADSL signals bus
Line module CXP
driver Status signal
CXP
Service access module Interface converting and control module
-48V/-60V System
1.2 V
2.5 V power supply
Power supply
3.3 V module -48V/-60V System
5V power supply
NOTE
In the Transmit Direction

The TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/
TNC2CXPN sends the service signals to the ADS2. The parallel/serial converting module
converts and sends the signals to the logic control unit, which processes the signals. The ADSL
transceiver unit of the service access module adapts the service signals into the ADSL service.
Then, the line driver amplifies the ADSL service and outputs it through the interface.
In the Receive Direction

The ADSL interface accesses the ADSL signals. Then, the ADSL transceiver unit of the service
access module stripes the ATM AAL5 adaptation layer from the ADSL signals and outputs
service signals. The logic control module processes the signals, and then sends the signals to the
backplane through the parallel/serial converting module.

l The ADSL transceiver unit strips the ATM AAL5 adaptation layer from the ADSL service
accessed from the interface and then outputs the service.
l The ADSL transceiver unit performs ATM AAL5 adaptation and encapsulation for the
service sent by the interface converting and control module and finally outputs the ADSL
service.
l The line driver unit amplifies the signals to be transmitted.

Interface Converting and Control Module

This module performs parallel/serial conversion for transporting the service between the system
control board and the local board.
The system control board controls and manages the board through the serial management bus.
In addition, the logic control unit detects alarms and reports them to the TNC1CXPA/
TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN through the
serial management bus.
Clock Module
The clock module provides working clock signals to each module.
Power Supply Module

This module provides DC voltages required by each module on the board.
2.16.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the ADS2, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 2-32 and Figure 2-33 show the appearance of the front panel of the ADS2.
Figure 2-32 Appearance of the front panel of the ADS2A
Figure 2-33 Appearance of the front panel of the ADS2B
Indicators
l LINK1 and LINK2 indicators, green, which indicate the port connection status.

Interfaces
Table 2-123 lists the types of the interfaces on the ADS2 and their respective usage.
Table 2-123 Types and usage of the interfaces on the ADS2
Interface on the Interface Type Usage Corresponding

Front Panel Cable
ADSL1, ADSL2 RJ-11 Accesses two channels of For details, see 8.6.4
ADSL services. xDSL Cables.
Table 2-124 lists the pins of the ADSL1 and ADSL2 interfaces.
Table 2-124 Pins of the ADSL1 and ADSL2 interface on the ADS2
Front View Pin No. Usage
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 RING
4 TIP
6543 21
5 Unspecified
6 Unspecified
2.16.5 Valid Slots

The ADS2 can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the ADS2.
You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the ADS2.
ADSL Interface

The technical specifications of the ADS2A/ADS2B cover the performance specifications, board
Table 2-125 and Table 2-126 list the performance specifications of the ADS2A/ADS2B.

Table 2-125 Performance specifications of the ADS2A
Interface Max. Upstream Rate Max. Downstream Transmission

Rate Distance
ADSL standard 0.896 Mbit/s 8 Mbit/s 5.5 km
ADSL2 1.2 Mbit/s 15 Mbit/s 5.5 km
ADSL2+ 1.2 Mbit/s 24 Mbit/s 5.5 km
Table 2-126 Performance specifications of the ADS2B
Interface Max. Upstream Rate Max. Downstream Transmission

Rate Distance
ADSL standard 0.896 Mbit/s 8 Mbit/s 4 km
ADSL2 1.2 Mbit/s 15 Mbit/s 4 km
ADSL2+ 1.2 Mbit/s 24 Mbit/s 4 km
Weight (kg): 0.54
ADS2A Power consumption (W, room temperature): 10.5
ADS2B Power consumption (W, room temperature): 10.4
2.17 SHD4
This section describes the SHD4, a 4-channel G.SHDSL service interface board, in terms of the
specifications.

The functional version of the SHD4 is TND1.

Used with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/
TNC2CXPN, the SHD4 can process the G.991.2 single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line
(G.SHDSL) service.
Table 2-127 lists the functions and features of the SHD4.

Table 2-127 Functions and Features of the SHD4
Basic function Provides four G.SHDSL interfaces and accesses 4 x G.SHDSL

signals.
Supports the ATM mode and the EFM mode.
The outgoing lines of the four G.SHDSL interfaces support the

M-Pair binding of lines. In addition, M can be 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Supports the G.SHDSL load sharing protection.
Clock Supplies the G.SHDSL line clock for TNC1CXPA/

TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN as system clock.
Application scenario The SHD4 is applied in the offload scenario. On the access side,
the OptiX PTN 910 performs ATM PWE3 emulation for the
HSDPA service flow. Then, the emulated service is
encapsulated in the tunnel required by the WMS network.
Finally, the SHD4 performs ATM adaptation for the service.
When entering the xDSL network, the encapsulated service is
transported to the opposite equipment, then decapsulated, and
finally transported to the RNC node.
Compliant norms ETSI SDSL (ETSI TS 101 524 V 1.2.1)
ETSI SDSL.bis (ETSI TS 101 524 V 1.2.2)
ITU G.shdsl (ITU-T G.991.2)
ITU G.shdls.bis (ITU-T G.991.2 (2004))
ITU G.hs (ITU-T G.994.1)
IEEE 802.3ah clause 61

The SHD4 mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting module, clock
Figure 2-34 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SHD4.

Figure 2-34 Block diagram for the working principle of the SHD4
Backplane
Clock signals
Each module Clock signals
Clock module CXP
of the board
Service
Parallel/serial
Signal bus
Service bus converting CXP
4 x G.SHDSL voltage Service module
and encapsulation Logic
signals
performs and bundling Management control Serial management bus
bus unit CXP
protection module
module Status signal
CXP
Interface converting and control
Service access module
module
1.2 V -48V/-60V System power

To each Power supply supply
1.5 V
module module -48V/-60V
3.3 V System power
supply
NOTE

The TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/
TNC2CXPN sends the service signals to the parallel/serial converting module and then to the
logic control unit, which processes the service signals. Finally, the service encapsulation and
bundling module decapsulates the service signals and outputs the G.SHDSL service.

The service board accesses the G.SHDSL signals and the service access module transforms the
signal voltage and performs protection for the signals. Then, the service encapsulation and
bundling module encapsulates and bundles the signals, adjusts the signal rate, frames the signals,
and then sends the signals to the logic control module, which processes the service signals.
Finally, the parallel/serial converting module converts and sends the service signals to the

l The service access module transforms the signal voltage and performs protection for the
access signals. Then, the service encapsulation and bundling module bundles four channels
of G.SHDSL signals, strips the ATM AAL5 adaptation layer, and finally outputs the service
signals.
l The interface converting and control module sends the service to the service encapsulation
and bundling module, which then performs ATM AAL5 adaptation and encapsulation, and
finally outputs the G.SHDSL service.


This module performs parallel/serial conversion for transporting the service between the system
control board and the local board.
The system control board controls and manages the board through the serial management bus.
In addition, the logic control unit detects alarms and reports them to the TNC1CXPA/
TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN through the
serial management bus.
Clock Module
The clock module provides working clock for each module on the SHD4.
Power Supply Module

This module provides DC voltages required by each module on the board.
2.17.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the SHD4, there are indicators, and interfaces.

Figure 2-35 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SHD4.
Figure 2-35 Appearance of the front panel of the SHD4
Indicators
l LINK1/LINK2/LINK3/LINK4 indicators, green, which indicate the port connection status.
Interfaces
Table 2-128 lists the types of the interfaces on the SHD4 and their respective usage.

Table 2-128 Types and usage of the interfaces on the SHD4
Interface Interface Usage Corresponding

on the Type Cable
Front Panel
SHDSL1 - RJ-11 Accesses the first 4 x G.SHDSL For details, see 8.6.4
SHDSL4 services. xDSL Cables.
Table 2-129 lists the pins of theSHDSL1 - SHDSL4 interfaces.
Table 2-129 Pins of the SHDSL1 - SHDSL4 interfaces on the SHD4
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 TIP
4 RING
6543 21
5 Unspecified
6 Unspecified
2.17.5 Valid Slots

The SHD4 can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the SDH4.
You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the SHD4.
G.SHDSL Interface

The technical specifications of the SHD4 cover the performance specifications, board
Table 2-130 lists the performance specifications of the SHD4.

Table 2-130 Performance specifications of the SHD4
Interface Max. Max. Max. Four-Line Max.

Upstream Downstream Bundling Rate Transmission
Rate Rate Distance
G.SHDSL 5.7 Mbit/s 5.7 Mbit/s 23 Mbit/s 5.25 km
Weight (kg): 0.60
2.18 SHD4I
This section describes the SHD4I, a 4-channel SHDSL service interface board that supports the
IMA mode, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid

The functional version of the SHD4I is TND1.

The SHD4I can access four channels of G.SHDSL signals encapsulated in the IMA format when
it is used with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/
TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN.
Table 2-131 lists the functions and features of the SHD4I.
Table 2-131 Functions and Features of the SHD4I

Feature
Basic Function Provides four G.SHDSL interfaces to access four channels of

G.SHDSL signals.
Accesses the service signals encapsulated in the IMA format and

supports one IMA group.
Provides the G.SHDSL load sharing protection in the IMA

encapsulation mode.
Supports the network timing recovery (NTR) function.
Supports the hot-swap function.
Compliant norms ETSI SDSL (ETSI TS 101 524 V 1.2.1)


Feature
ETSI SDSL.bis (ETSI TS 101 524 V 1.2.2)
ITU G.shdsl (ITU-T G.991.2)
ITU G.shdls.bis (ITU-T G.991.2 (2004))
ITU G.hs (ITU-T G.994.1)

The SHD4I mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting and control
module, IMA processing module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 2-36 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SHD4I.
Figure 2-36 Block diagram for the working principle of the SHD4I
Management and Backplane
control bus
Service signals
IMA processing IMA service signals CXP
module ATM cells
Serial
Interface management bus
converting and CXP
control module
4 x G.SHDSL signals Service access IMA service signals
Status signal bus
module Management CXP
and control bus
4 x NTR clock signals

Clock signals
Working clock signals Clock module CXP
To each module on the SHD4I
3.3 V -48 V/-60 V System

1.8 V power supply
To each module Power supply
1.5 V
on the SHD4I module -48 V/-60 V System
1.2 V
power supply
NOTE

The RJ-11 interfaces access the G.SHDSL signals to the service access module. Then, the service
access module works with the IMA processing module to multiplexes the service signals, and
sends the ATM cells to the interface converting and control module. The interface converting
and control module decapsulates the ATM frames, converts the parallel signals to serial signals,
converges the serial signals to one channel service signal, and finally sends the service signal to
the backplane.


The interface converting and control module receives the service signal from the backplane,
converts the serial signal to parallel signal, encapsulates the signals in the ATM frame format,
and then sends the ATM frames to the service access module. The service access module
processes the ATM cells and work with the IMA processing module to inversely multiplexes
the ATM signals as IMA signals. Finally, the service access module sends the packets to the
G.SHDSL interfaces.

This module accesses the service packets in different modes according to the encapsulation mode
of the G.SHDSL interfaces. In addition, this module has the thunder protection function.
l In the receive direction, this module converts the serial packets to parallel packets, and
sends the parallel packets to the interface converting and control module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the IMA service signals from the interface
converting and control module, converts the serial IMA service signals to parallel IMA
service signals, and finally sends the parallel IMA service signals to the G.SHDSL
interfaces.
l In addition, this module extracts the NTR clock signals from the G.SHDSL service signals
received and sends the clock signals to the clock module.

This module converges the G.SHDSL service signals to one channel service signal and works
with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/
TNC2CXPN to manage and control the SHD4I.
l In the receive direction, this module receives the IMA service signals from the service
access module, converts the IMA service signals, and sends the service signals to the IMA
processing module, which multiplexes the service signals. Then, this module receives the
ATM cells from the IMA processing module, decapsulates the ATM frames, converts the
parallel signals to serial signals, converges the signals to one channel service signal, and
finally sends the service signal to the backplane.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signal from the backplane,
converts the serial signal to parallel signal, encapsulates the service signal into ATM
frames, and sends the ATM cells to the IMA processing module, which inversely
multiplexes the ATM signals. Then, this module receives IMA signals from the IMA
processing module and finally sends the IMA signals to the service access module.
l In addition, this module works with the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/
TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN to manage and control each module
on the SHD4I.
IMA Processing Module

l In the receive direction, this module receives the IMA service signals from the interface
converting and control module, multiplexes the service signals as ATM signals, and finally

sends the ATM signals to the interface converting and control module, which converges
the signals.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the backplane after
the interface converting and control module processes the service signals. Then, this module
inversely multiplexes the ATM signals and sends the IMA service signals to the interface
converting and control module.
Clock Module
l Selects a clock source from the four channels of NTR clock signals and uploads the clock
signals to the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/
TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN.
l Provides working clock signals for each module on the SHD4I board.
Power Supply Module

This module provides the following DC voltages for the modules on the SHD4I board:
l 3.3 V
l 1.8 V
l 1.5 V
l 1.2 V
2.18.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the SHD4I, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 2-37 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SHD4I.
Figure 2-37 Appearance of the front panel of the SHD4I
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the SHD4I:

l LINK1, LINK2, LINK3 and LINK4 indicators, green, which indicate the port connection
status.
Interface
Table 2-132 lists the types of the interfaces on the SHD4I and their respective usage.
Table 2-132 Types and usage of the interfaces on the SHD4I
Interface on the Interface Usage Corresponding

Front Panel Type Cable
SHDSL1- RJ-11 Input and output G.SHDSL For details, see 8.6.4
SHDSL4 signals. xDSL Cables.
Table 2-133 lists the pins of the SHDSL1-SHDSL4 interfaces.
Table 2-133 Pins of the SHDSL1 - SHDSL4 interfaces on the SHD4I
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 TIP
4 RING
6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Unspecified
6 Unspecified
2.18.5 Valid Slots

The SHD4I can be housed in slot 3 or slot 4.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the SHD4I.
You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the SHD4I.
G.SHDSL Interface


The technical specifications of the SHD4I cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,
Table 2-134 lists the specifications of the interfaces of the SHD4I.
Table 2-134 Specifications of the interfaces of the SHD4I
Interface Max. Max. Max. Rate of Max.

Upstream Rate Downstream Four Bundled Transmission
(Mbit/s) Rate (Mbit/s) Interfaces Distance (km)
(Mbit/s)
G.SHDSL 2.3 2.3 9.2 5.25
2.19 PIU
This section describes the PIU, a power input unit, in terms of the version, functions, features,
working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.

The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.

The PIU, a power access board, supports the functions and features such as power access, power
protection, surge protection detection, and information reporting.
Table 2-135 lists functions and features of the PIU.
Table 2-135 Functions and features of the PIU
Power access One PIU accesses two -48 V DC (or -60 V DC) power supplies for
the equipment.
Power protection The PIU protects the power supply against overcurrent and short
circuit. In this way, the overcurrent is prevented from shocking
boards and components on them.

surge protection The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an
alarm if the protection fails.
Power backup The two DC power supplies back up each other.

The PIU mainly consists of the lighting protection and failure detection module, communication
unit module, and board in-position module.
Figure 2-38 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the PIU.
Figure 2-38 Block diagram for the working principle of the PIU
Backplane
-48 V/-60 V Lightning protection and
failure detection module
Each board
-48 V/-60 V Lightning protection and

failure detection module
Lightning protection failure Each board
Lightning protection failure alarm signals
alarm signals
Communication Inter-board
communication bus CXP
Board in-position module

Board in-position CXP
signals
NOTE
In Figure 2-38, the CXP on the backplane indicates the system control, cross-connect and protocol
processing board. For OptiX PTN 910, the CXP indicates the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/
TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN.
Lighting Protection and Failure Detection Module

This module protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the anti-lightning
circuit. If the surge protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to the TNC1CXPA/
Communication Unit Module

This module has the function of reporting the board manufacturing information, PCB version
information, and alarm signals about the surge protection failure.
Board In-Position Module

This module reports the board in-position signals to the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/

2.19.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the PIU, there are indicators, a label and power supply interfaces.

Figure 2-39 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 2-39 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU
Indicators
The following indicator is present on the front panel of the PIU.
PWRA/PWRB, green, which indicates the power supply status. When PWRA/PWRB is on and
green, it indicates that power is accessed.
Interfaces
The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 2-136 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU
and their respective usage. For cable corresponding to the interfaces, see 8.2 -48 V Power Supply
Cable.
Table 2-136 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU
Interface on the Front Panel Usage
NEG1(-) -48 V power input interface
RTN1(+) BGND power input interface
NEG2(-) -48 V power input interface

Interface on the Front Panel Usage
RTN2(+) BGND power input interface
Label
Operation warning label: indicates the following precaution, which should be taken for removal
or insertion of the PIU board.
NOTICE
Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,
make sure that these power supplies are disabled.
Do not remove or insert the board with power on.
2.19.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be housed in slot 5 in the chassis.

The technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption,
and input voltage.
Table 2-137 lists the technical specifications of the PIU.
Table 2-137 Technical specifications of the PIU
Item Technical Specification
Board dimensions (mm) 41.4 (H) x 224.8 (D) x 21.0 (W)
Weight (kg) 0.12
Power consumption (W, room temperature) 0.5
Input voltage (V) -38.4 to -72.0
2.20 FAN
This section describes the FAN, a fan board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working
principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.


The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.

The FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed, detect and report status of fans.
The functions and features of the FAN are as follows:
l Accesses one 12 V power supply for driving three fans that each consumes 6 W power.
l Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans and protects fans against
overcurrent.
l Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the
system.
l Reports information about the fan rotating speed, environment temperature, alarms, version
number, and board in-position information.
l Provides alarm indicators.

The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay module, communication unit module, intelligent fan
speed adjustment module, and board in-position module.
Figure 2-40shows the block diagram for the working principle of the FAN.
Figure 2-40 Block diagram for the working principle of the FAN
Fans x 3
12 V Backplane
12 V 12V
Start-delay module
CXP
12 V 12 V power shut signals

Inter-board
Communication unit communication bus
module CXP
Fan-speed signals
Fan-speed
reporting module CXP
PWM signals PWM driver

module CXP
Intelligent fan speed
adjustment module
Fan in-position
Board in-position signals
module CXP
NOTE
In the block diagram, the CXP on the backplane indicates the system control, cross-connect and protocol
processing board. For OptiX PTN 910, the CXP indicates the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/

Start-delay Module
This module has the function of provides start-delay to the power supply for fans and protects
fans against overcurrent.
Communication Unit Module

This module reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version, and environment
temperature information. In addition, this module provides 12 V power shut signals to the start-
delay module.
Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Module

This module reports information about the fan rotating speed to the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/
TNC1CXPG/TNC1CXPH/TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI/TNC2CXPN and adjusts the fan rotating
speed according to the three pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals received from the
The PWM signal of one fan is isolated from that of another.
Board In-Position Module

This module reports the board in-position signals to the TNC1CXPA/TNC1CXPB/TNC1CXPG/
2.20.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, handle, and labels.

Figure 2-41 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
Figure 2-41 Appearance of the front panel

Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the FAN:
FAN indicator, red or green, which indicates status of fans.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack

The ESD wrist strap should be connected to this jack for proper grounding of the human body.
Handle
The handle is used for pushing the FAN into or pulling the FAN out of the chassis during board
replacement.
Label
The following labels are present on the front panel of the FAN:
l ESD protection label, which indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.

l Fan warning label, which says that do not touch the fan leaves before the fan stops rotating.
2.20.5 Valid Slots

The FAN can be housed in slot 6 in the chassis.

The technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and input voltage.
Table 2-138 lists the technical specifications of the FAN.
Table 2-138 Technical specifications of the FAN
Item Technical Specification
Board dimensions (mm) 42.0 (H) x 217.6 (D) x 28.5 (W)
Weight (kg) 0.20
Power consumption (W) l Low rate: 2.3

l Medium rate: 6.1
l High rate: 17
Working voltage (V) 12 V DC power

Hardware Description 3 Filler Panel
3 Filler Panel
About This Chapter
A filler panel is used to cover any vacant slot in a chassis.
3.1 Functions and Features

A filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances,
and ensure proper ventilation.
3.2 Appearance and Valid Slots

There is no indicator or interface on a filler panel.

Hardware Description 3 Filler Panel
3.1 Functions and Features

A filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances,
and ensure proper ventilation.
Main functions of a filler panel are as follows:
l Performs electromagnetic shielding and ensures that the chassis meets the requirement of
electromagnetic radiation.
l Prevents foreign substances from getting into the chassis.
l Prevents internal circuit from being exposed.
l Ensures proper ventilation of cooling current inside the chassis.
3.2 Appearance and Valid Slots

There is no indicator or interface on a filler panel.
Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of a filler panel.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of a filler panel
Valid Slots
A filler panel can be housed in any of slots 3-4 of a chassis.

Hardware Description 4 Pluggable Optical Modules
4 Pluggable Optical Modules
About This Chapter
Optical interface boards for the OptiX PTN 910 use the enhanced small form-factor pluggable
(eSFP) optical module.
The eSFP optical module, which is a protocol-independent optical transceiver applicable to

optical communication, implements O/E and E/O conversion for signals, and supports query of
information such as the transceiver performance and manufacturer.
4.1 Appearance and Application

The eSFP optical module can be inserted in STM-1, FE, and GE optical interfaces.
4.2 Optical Module Labels

Optical module labels, attached to the optical modules, are used to distinguish different types of
optical modules.

4.1 Appearance and Application

The eSFP optical module can be inserted in STM-1, FE, and GE optical interfaces.
Appearance
Figure 4-1 shows the appearance of the eSFP optical module.
Figure 4-1 Appearance example of the eSFP optical module
Two-fiber bidirectional optical module Single-fiber bidirectional optical module
Application
Table 4-1 lists the boards where the eSFP optical module is applicable.
Table 4-1 Boards where the eSFP optical module is applicable

Board Type Board Name
GE optical interface board EG2, CXPG/CXPH, CXPI, EG4F
FE optical interface board EF8F, CXPI
STM-1 optical interface board CD1
4.2 Optical Module Labels

Optical module labels, attached to the optical modules, are used to distinguish different types of
optical modules.
Figure 4-2 shows the optical module labels.
Figure 4-2 Optical module label

Optical module code

As shown in Table 4-2, different types of optical modules have different codes.
Table 4-2 Codes and types of optical modules
Optical Module Optical Optical Module Basic Information Mapping

Code Interface Type Board
34060286 1000BASE-SX Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 850 nm, 2.125 Gbit/ CXPG/CXPH
(0.5 km) s (Multi rate), LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km TNC1CXPI/
TNC2CXPI
34060473 1000BASE-LX Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/
TNC2CXPN
(10 km) s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km
TND1EG2
34060290 1000BASE-LX Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/ TND2EG2
(10 km) s, LC ( - 40 to 85), Single-mode, 10 km EG4F
34060298 1000BASE-VX Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/

34060360 1000BASE-ZX Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/

34060483 1000BASE- Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1471 nm, 100 Mbit/ CXPG/CXPH
CWDM s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km TNC1CXPI/
(80 km) TNC2CXPI
TNC2CXPN
34060481 1000BASE- Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1491 nm, 100 Mbit/
CWDM s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km TND1EG2
(80 km) TND2EG2
EG4F
CWDM s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
(80 km)

(80 km)

(80 km)

(80 km)

(80 km)

Optical Module Optical Optical Module Basic Information Mapping

Code Interface Type Board

(80 km)
34060276 100BASE-FX Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1, TNC1CXPI/

/S-1.1 LC, Single-mode, 15 km TNC2CXPI
(15 km) TNC2CXPN

EF8F
34060307 100BASE-FX Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1,
CD1
/S-1.1 LC, Single-mode, 15 km
EG4F
(15 km)

/L-1.1 LC, Single-mode, 40 km
(40 km)
34060308 100BASE-FX Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1

(40 km)

(80 km)

(80 km)
34060475 1000BASE-BX BiDi Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1310 CXPG/CXPH

(10 km) nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km TNC1CXPI/
TNC2CXPI
34060470 1000BASE-BX BiDi Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490
TNC2CXPN
(10 km) nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km
TND1EG2
34060539 1000BASE-BX BiDi Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490 TND2EG2
(40 km) nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km EG4F
34060540 1000BASE-BX BiDi Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1310

(40 km) nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km

Hardware Description 5 Pluggable Electrical Module
5 Pluggable Electrical Module
A pluggable electrical module is used at a GE SFP interface to transmit/receive GE electrical

signals.
Appearance
Figure 5-1 shows the appearance of the SFP electrical module.
Figure 5-1 Appearance of the GE SFP electrical module
Part Number
Table 5-1 lists the part number and the type of the pluggable module.
Table 5-1 Part number and type of electrical module
Electrical Electrical Electrical Module Basic Mapping Board

Module Part interface type Information
Numbers
34100080 1000BASE-T 1000BASE-T (RJ45) SFP CXPG/CXPH

Electrical Module, 100m TNC1CXPI/TNC2CXPI
TNC1CXPN

Hardware Description 6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply

System
About This Chapter
This section describes the EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply system in terms of the
appearance, functions, front panel, and technical specifications.
6.1 Structure and Functions

The EPS30-4815AF external power supply system inputs 220 V/110 V AC power and converts
the power to -53.5 V DC required by the OptiX PTN 910. When input of the 220 V/110 V AC
power stops, the EPS30-4815AF automatically switches to the storage battery, which provides
power to the equipment. This ensures uninterruptible power supply to the equipment. The
EPS30-4815AF consists of the rectifier modules, monitoring module, and AC/DC power
distribution frame.
6.2 Front Panel

On the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF, there are indicators, interfaces, and output branch
fuses.
6.3 Technical Specifications

The technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF cover the input/output voltage, current,


The EPS30-4815AF external power supply system inputs 220 V/110 V AC power and converts
the power to -53.5 V DC required by the OptiX PTN 910. When input of the 220 V/110 V AC
power stops, the EPS30-4815AF automatically switches to the storage battery, which provides
power to the equipment. This ensures uninterruptible power supply to the equipment. The
EPS30-4815AF consists of the rectifier modules, monitoring module, and AC/DC power
distribution frame.
Structure
Figure 6-1 shows the appearance of the EPS30-4815AF and Table 6-1 lists the components of
the EPS30-4815AF.
Figure 6-1 Appearance of the EPS30-4815AF
NOTICE
The interface DB50 on the monitoring module is reserved. Do not use the interface on the
monitoring module; otherwise, the EPS30-4815AF will be reset or damaged.
Table 6-1 Components of the EPS30-4815AF
Component Description
Rectifier modules Converts AC power to DC power. The EPS30-4815AF can be

configured with one or two rectifier modules.

Component Description
Monitoring module Monitors the EPS30-4815AF and storage batteries. Two RS232/
RS485 communication interfaces are provided and one DB50
interface is reserved.
AC/DC power distribution Provides an interface for inputting AC power, two load
frame interfaces, and an interface for connecting to the storage
batteries, and the fuses that can be replaced.
Functions
Functions of the EPS30-4815AF are as follows:
l Provides an interface for inputting AC power to provide 220 V/110 V AC power to the
equipment.
l Provides two hot-pluggable rectifier modules to convert AC power to DC power. The two
rectifier modules work at the same time in load-sharing mode and they are hot backups for
each other.
The EPS30-4815AF is configured with one or two rectifier modules. When one rectifier
module is configured, the maximum output current is 15 A; when two rectifier modules
are configured, the maximum output current is 30 A.
NOTE
A filler panel must be inserted into an empty slot intended for a rectifier module.
l Provides an active and a standby RS232/RS485 communication interfaces, enables the
device to monitor the AC input status of the EPS30–4815 power supply system, and
reserves one DB50 interface for later extension of the monitoring function.
l Provides two load interfaces for outputting -53.5 V DC power to PIU, which provide power
to the OptiX PTN 910.
l Provides two load control fuses, that is, FU-1 with a fuse capacity of 10 A and FU-2 with
a fuse capacity of 20 A. These fuses enable/disable output of the load and provide overload
and short-circuit protection for the load.
l Provides one interface for connecting to a group of storage batteries. When working
normally, the EPS30-4815AF is charging the storage batteries. When input of the 220 V/
110 V AC power stops, the storage batteries provide power to the OptiX PTN 910. This
ensures uninterruptible power supply to the OptiX PTN 910.
Figure 6-2 shows the appearance of a storage battery and Figure 6-3 shows a storage
battery tray with storage batteries.
l Provides a storage battery protection fuse, that is, FU-3 with a fuse capacity of 20 A. This
fuse enables/disables the storage batteries and provides overload and short-circuit
protection for the storage batteries.

Figure 6-2 Appearance of a storage battery
Figure 6-3 Appearance of a storage battery tray with storage batteries

Storage battery
Tray
6.2 Front Panel

On the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF, there are indicators, interfaces, and output branch
fuses.

Figure 6-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF.
Figure 6-4 Appearance of the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF

Indicators
Indicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules are present on the front panel of the
EPS30-4815AF. Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 list the indications of indicators for the rectifier and
monitoring modules respectively.
Table 6-2 Indicators for the rectifier modules
Indicator Indication Color Normal Abnormal Cause of Exception

State State
RUN Running Green On Off The rectifier modules are running

indicator normally.
ALM Protection Yellow Off On A fault that can be rectified occurs on

indicator a rectifier module.
Blinking Communication on a rectifier module

is interrupted.
FAULT Fault Red Off On A fault that cannot be rectified occurs

indicator on a rectifier module.
Note 1: When a severe fault occurs, the indicator (red) is on and the indicators (yellow and green) are off. The
indicators (yellow and green) are on only when the indicator (red) is off.
Note 2: The indicator (yellow) is always on when communication on a rectifier module is interrupted, a rectifier
module is overheated or endures overcurrent or undercurrent, or a rectifier module is disabled.
Table 6-3 Indicators for the monitoring module
Indicat Indicatio Color Normal Abnorm Cause of Exception

or n State al State
RUN Running Green Blinking at Off The monitoring module is

indicator 1s running abnormally.
internals
Blinking Abnormal communication
at 125 ms
internals
ALM Alarm Red Off On The EPS30-4815AF reports an

indicator alarm.
Interfaces
Table 6-4 lists types and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF.

Table 6-4 Interfaces on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF
Interface Numb Interface Description Remarks

Name er of Type
Interfa
ces
AC INPUT 1 - 220 V/110 V AC power input -

interface
RS232/RS485 2 RJ-45 RS232/RS485 It is recommended to use the active

communication interfaces. interface.
The monitoring module
communicates with the
equipment, reports alarms,
and implements remote
control through these
interfaces.
The interface on the left is the
active interface and the
interface on the right is the
standby interface. The active
and standby interfaces cannot
be used at the same time.
COM 1 DB50 The monitoring module is Reserved interface

connected to various sensors
through the COM interface.
LOAD1 1 - Output interface for load 1 LOAD1 and LOAD2 provide DC

power for two PIUs. For how to
LOAD2 1 - Output interface for load 2 connect the load interfaces to the
BATT 1 - Interface for connecting to the PIUs, see the OptiX PTN 910
storage batteries Installation Guide.
The pins marked with + and - are
connected to the 48V+ and 48V-
poles of the cable connector
respectively.
Table 6-6 lists the relationships of the
load output interfaces, interface for
connecting to the storage batteries,
and fuses.

Table 6-5 Pins of the RS232/RS485 communication interface used as a monitoring signal input/
output interface
Front View Pin Description
1 Transmit positive in RS485 communication

87654321
mode
2 Transmit negative in RS485 communication

mode
3 -
4 Receive positive in RS485 communication

mode
5 Receive negative in RS485 communication

mode
6 -
7 Grounding end
8 Grounding end
Note 1: The power supply system and the ATN device can communicate in two modes: RS232
and RS485. The specific communication mode is determined by the DIP switch on the
monitoring module. For details on the DIP switch, seeDIP Switch. Only in RS485
communication mode, the device can monitor the AC power input status of the power supply
system.
Note 2: The RS485 communication mode applies only when the power supply system and
the PTN device use the primary/secondary node communication protocol to communicate
with each other.
Output branch fuses

There are three replaceable fuses on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF. The fuses disable/
enable the load and storage batteries, and provide overload and short-circuit protection for the
load and storage batteries.
Table 6-6 Relationships of the load output interfaces, interface for connecting to the storage
batteries, and fuses
Output Branch Fuse Load Branch
FU-1 (10 A) LOAD1 (10 A)
FU-2 (20 A) LOAD2 (20 A)
FU-BT (20 A) BATT (20 A)

DIP Switch
There is a DIP switch on the monitoring module of the EPS30-4815AF. Figure 6-5 shows the
default setting and location of the DIP switch.
Figure 6-5 Default setting and location of the DIP switch
NOTICE
Do not change the default setting of the DIP switch. Otherwise, the EPS30-4815AF is affected.
The DIP switch indicates eight bits in binary format (on: 1; off: 0). The default value of the eight
bits is 00000100. The functions of the eight bits are as follows:
l The first five bits indicate the local and remote power addresses. Bit 5 is the highest bit and
bit 1 is the lowest bit.
l Bit 6 sets the baud rate of communication between the monitoring module and equipment.
When bit 6 is 1, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s; when bit 6 is 0, the baud rate is 19200 bit/s.
l Bits 7 and 8 are reserved.

The technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF cover the input/output voltage, current,
Table 6-7 lists the technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF.
Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF
Item Specification
AC input Rated input voltage 220/110 (90 to 280) V AC
Maximum input 10 A
current
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Battery input Rated input voltage 48 V

Item Specification
Capacity 40 Ah
Number of 4
batteries
DC output Rated output -53.5 V DC

voltage
Output current LOAD1: 10 A (determined by the fuse)

LOAD 2: 20 A (determined by the fuse)
Dimensions of the EPS30-4815AF 43.6 mm (H) x 482.6 mm (W) x 270 mm (D)

(mounting ears included)
Weight of the EPS30-4815AF < 10 kg
Dimensions of a battery 170 mm (H) x 197 mm (W) x 165 mm (D)

Hardware Description 7 ETP4830-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
7 ETP4830-4815AF External AC Power Supply

System
About This Chapter
This section describes the ETP4830-4815AF external AC power supply system in terms of the
appearance, functions, front panel, and technical specifications.

The ETP4830-4815AF external power supply system inputs 220 V/110 V AC power and
converts the power to -53.5 V DC required by the OptiX PTN 910. When input of the 220 V/
110 V AC power stops, the ETP4830-4815AF automatically switches to the storage battery,
which provides power to the equipment. This ensures uninterruptible power supply to the
equipment. The ETP4830-4815AF consists of the rectifier modules, monitoring module, and
AC/DC power distribution frame.
7.2 Front Panel

On the front panel of the ETP4830-4815AF, there are indicators, buttons, interfaces, and output
branch fuses.

The technical specifications of the ETP4830-4815AF cover the environmental conditions, input/
output voltage, current, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


The ETP4830-4815AF external power supply system inputs 220 V/110 V AC power and
converts the power to -53.5 V DC required by the OptiX PTN 910. When input of the 220 V/
110 V AC power stops, the ETP4830-4815AF automatically switches to the storage battery,
which provides power to the equipment. This ensures uninterruptible power supply to the
equipment. The ETP4830-4815AF consists of the rectifier modules, monitoring module, and
AC/DC power distribution frame.
Structure
Figure 7-1 shows the appearance of the ETP4830-4815AF and Table 7-1 lists the components
of the ETP4830-4815AF.
Figure 7-1 Appearance of the ETP4830-4815AF
NOTICE
The interface DB50 on the monitoring module is reserved. Do not use the interface on the
monitoring module; otherwise, the ETP4830-4815AF will be reset or damaged.
Table 7-1 Components of the ETP4830-4815AF
Component Config Description

uration
Rectifier modules 1 to 2 Converts AC power to DC power.
Monitoring module 1 Monitors the ETP4830-4815AF and storage batteries.

Two RS232/RS485 communication interfaces are
provided and one DB50 interface is reserved.
AC/DC power 1 Provides an interface for inputting AC power, two load

distribution frame interfaces, and an interface for connecting to the storage
batteries, and the fuses that can be replaced.

Functions
Functions of the ETP4830-4815AF are as follows:
l Provides an interface for inputting AC power to provide 220 V/110 V AC power to the
equipment.
l Provides two hot-pluggable rectifier modules to convert AC power to DC power. The two
rectifier modules work at the same time in load-sharing mode and they are hot backups for
each other.
The ETP4830-4815AF is configured with one or two rectifier modules. When one rectifier
module is configured, the maximum output current is 15 A; when two rectifier modules
are configured, the maximum output current is 30 A.
NOTE
A filler panel must be inserted into an empty slot intended for a rectifier module.
l Provides an active and a standby RS232/RS485 communication interfaces, enables the
device to monitor the AC input status of the ETP4830-4815AF power supply system, and
reserves one DB50 interface for later extension of the monitoring function.
l Provides two load interfaces for outputting -53.5 V DC power to PIU, which provide power
to the OptiX PTN 910.
l Provides two load control fuses, that is, FU-1 with a fuse capacity of 10 A and FU-2 with
a fuse capacity of 20 A. These fuses enable/disable output of the load and provide overload
and short-circuit protection for the load.
l Provides one interface for connecting to a group of storage batteries. When working
normally, the ETP4830-4815AF is charging the storage batteries. When input of the 220
V/110 V AC power stops, the storage batteries provide power to the OptiX PTN 910. This
ensures uninterruptible power supply to the OptiX PTN 910.
Figure 7-2 shows the appearance of a storage battery and Figure 7-3 shows a storage
battery tray with storage batteries.
l Provides a storage battery protection fuse, that is, FU-3 with a fuse capacity of 20 A. This
fuse enables/disables the storage batteries and provides overload and short-circuit
protection for the storage batteries.
Figure 7-2 Appearance of a storage battery

Figure 7-3 Appearance of a storage battery tray with storage batteries

Storage battery
Tray
7.2 Front Panel

On the front panel of the ETP4830-4815AF, there are indicators, buttons, interfaces, and output
branch fuses.

Figure 7-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ETP4830-4815AF.
Figure 7-4 Appearance of the front panel of the ETP4830-4815AF
Indicators
Indicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules are present on the front panel of the
ETP4830-4815AF. Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 list the indications of indicators for the rectifier
and monitoring modules respectively.
Table 7-2 Indicators for the rectifier modules
Indicator Color Status Description
Power Green Steady on The rectifier has an AC power input.

indicator
Off The rectifier has no AC power input.
The rectifier is faulty.
On 2s and off 2s The rectifier is being queried.

Indicator Color Status Description
On 250 ms and The rectifier is loading an application program.

off 250 ms
Alarm Yellow Off No alarm is generated.

indicator
Steady on The rectifier generates an alarm for power limiting due to
ambient overtemperature.
The rectifier generates an alarm for shutdown due to ambient
overtemperature or undertemperature.
The rectifier protects against AC input overvoltage or

undervoltage.
The rectifier is hibernating.
On 2s and off 2s The communication between the rectifier and the SMU is
interrupted.
Fault indicator Red Off The rectifier is running properly.
Steady on The rectifier locks out due to output overvoltage.
The rectifier has no output due to an internal fault.
Table 7-3 Indicators for the monitoring module
Indicat Indicatio Color Normal Abnorm Cause of Exception

or n State al State
RUN Running Green Blinking at Off The monitoring module is

indicator 1s running abnormally.
internals
Blinking Abnormal communication
at 125 ms
internals
ALM Alarm Red Off On The ETP4830-4815AF reports

indicator an alarm.
Buttons
Table 7-4 describes the buttons on the panel of the monitoring module.
Table 7-4 Button description
Button Name Description
Up or Down Allows you to view menu items and set the

or value of a menu item.

Button Name Description
Back Returns to the previous menu without saving

the settings.
Enter l Enters the main menu from the standby

screen.
l Enters a submenu from the main menu.
l Saves the menu settings.
Note:
l The standby screen is displayed and the LCD screen becomes dark if you do not press any
button for 5 minutes.
l You need to log in again to enter the control and setting menus if you do not press any
button for 8 minutes.
Interfaces
Table 7-5 lists types and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the ETP4830-4815AF.
Table 7-5 Interfaces on the front panel of the ETP4830-4815AF

Name er of Type
Interfa
ces
AC INPUT 1 - 220 V/110 V AC power input -

interface
RS232/RS485 2 RJ-45 RS232/RS485 It is recommended to use the active

communication interfaces. interface.
The monitoring module
communicates with the
equipment, reports alarms,
and implements remote
control through these
interfaces.
The interface on the left is the
active interface and the
interface on the right is the
standby interface. The active
and standby interfaces cannot
be used at the same time.
COM 1 DB50 The monitoring module is Reserved interface

connected to various sensors
through the COM interface.


Name er of Type
Interfa
ces
LOAD1 1 - Output interface for load 1 LOAD1 and LOAD2 provide DC

power for two PIUs. For how to
LOAD2 1 - Output interface for load 2 connect the load interfaces to the
BATT 1 - Interface for connecting to the PIUs, see Overview of IMB Network
storage batteries Cabinet in the OptiX PTN 910
Installation Guide.
The pins marked with + and - are
connected to the 48 V+ and 48 V-
poles of the cable connector
respectively.
Table 7-7 lists the relationships of the
load output interfaces, interface for
connecting to the storage batteries,
and fuses.
ALM1 1 - Dry contact output 1 Mains Fault, DC Over Volt, DC

Under Volt, Batt Off, Batt Loop Trip,
Rect Fault, Load Fuse Trip
Alarm severity: Major
ALM2 1 - Dry contact output 2 AC Over Volt, AC Under Volt, Amb.

Over Temp1, Amb. Under Temp1,
Batt Over Temp, Batt Under Temp,
Rect Protect, Rect Comm Fail, Batt
Over Curr, Dig. Input1 ALM, Dig.
Input2 ALM, Batt Discharge
Alarm severity: Minor
ALM3 1 - Dry contact output 3 -
ALM4 1 - Dry contact output 4 -
Table 7-6 Pins of the RS232/RS485 communication interface used as a monitoring signal input/
output interface
1 Transmit positive in RS485 communication

87654321
mode
2 Transmit negative in RS485 communication

mode
3 -

4 Receive positive in RS485 communication

mode
5 Receive negative in RS485 communication

mode
6 -
7 Grounding end
8 Grounding end
Output branch fuses

There are three replaceable fuses on the front panel of the ETP4830-4815AF. The fuses disable/
enable the load and storage batteries, and provide overload and short-circuit protection for the
load and storage batteries.
Table 7-7 Relationships of the load output interfaces, interface for connecting to the storage
batteries, and fuses
Output Branch Fuse Load Branch
FU-1 (20 A) LOAD1 (20 A)
FU-2 (20 A) LOAD2 (20 A)
FU-BT (20 A) BATT (20 A)

The technical specifications of the ETP4830-4815AF cover the environmental conditions, input/
output voltage, current, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 7-8 lists the technical specifications of the ETP4830-4815AF.
Table 7-8 Technical specifications of the ETP4830-4815AF
Categor Item Specifications

y
Environ Operating -40ºC to +70ºC

mental temperature NOTE
conditio The system can run for 8 hours at 70ºC.
ns
Transportation -40ºC to +70ºC
temperature


y
Storage -40ºC to +70ºC

temperature
Operating 5%-95%
humidity
Altitude 0-4000 m
When the altitude ranges from 2000 m to 4000 m, the operating
temperature decreases by 1ºC for each additional 200 m.
AC input Input mode Single-phase three-wire (L, N, PE)
Input voltage 85-300 V AC (rated voltage: 220 V AC)
Input frequency 45-66 Hz (rated frequency: 50/60 Hz)
Power factor ≥ 0.99 (100% load)
Maximum 94%
efficiency of the
rectifier module
Battery Rated input 48 V

input voltage
Capacity 40 Ah
Number of 4
batteries
DC Output voltage -42 V DC - -58 V DC

output range
Default output -53.5 V DC

voltage
Output current l FU-1 (20 A)

l FU-2 (20 A)
l FU-BT (20 A)
Maximum 2000 W (input voltage: 176 V AC to 300 V AC); 940 W (input

power output voltage: 85 V AC to 175 V AC)
NOTE
Number of rectifiers multiplied by the output power of a single rectifier
Regulated ≤ ±0.6%
voltage
precision
Peak-to-peak ≤ 200 mV (0–20 MHz)

noise voltage


y
Structure Dimensions (H 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 255 mm

x W x D)
Weight ≤10 kg (with rectifiers)
Protection level IP20
Installation Adapts to 19-inch cabinets and ETSI cabinets by using

mode different types of mounting ears
Maintenance Maintained from the front

mode
Cooling mode air cooling, with two fans embedded
Dimensions of a 170 mm (H) x 197 mm (W) x 165 mm (D)

battery

Hardware Description 8 Fibers and Cables
8 Fibers and Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes various fibers and cables used on the equipment, including fibers, power
cables, ground cables, service cables, management cables, clock cables, and alarm cables.
8.1 Fibers
This section describes the types of fibers and fiber connectors.
8.2 -48 V Power Supply Cable

The OptiX PTN 910 uses 1 U DC connectors to receive external power.
8.3 Power Cable for the EPS30-4815AF

The EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply inputs external power supplies through AC
power cables. The EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply is connected to the OptiX PTN
910 and batteries through DC power cables.
8.4 Power Cable for the ETP4830-4815AF

The ETP4830-4815AF external AC power supply inputs external power supplies through AC
power cables. The ETP4830-4815AF external AC power supply is connected to the OptiX PTN
8.5 PGND Cables

PGND cables are used to ground the OptiX PTN 910.
8.6 Service Cables

The service cables include Ethernet cables, 75-ohm 16 x E1 cables, 120-ohm 16 x E1 cables,
and telephone wires.
8.7 Management Cables

On the OptiX PTN 910, Ethernet cables are used to input and output NM signals.
8.8 Clock Cables

The clock cables used on the OptiX PTN 910 include external clock cables and 120-to-75-ohm
clock cables.
8.9 Alarm Input/Output Cables

On the OptiX PTN 910, the RJ45 connectors are used to input the alarm signals from the external
equipment and output the local alarm signals to the equipment that monitors all the alarms.

8.1 Fibers
This section describes the types of fibers and fiber connectors.
8.1.1 Fiber Types

Single-mode fibers or multi-mode fibers can be used on the OptiX PTN 910.
Table 8-1 lists the types of fibers used on the OptiX PTN 910.
Table 8-1 Types of Fiber
Connector Fiber
Outer Mode of
Connector 1 Connector 2 Type
diameter transmission
Single-mode G.652D
2 mm
LC/PC Multi-mode A1B
0.9 mm Single-mode G.652D

LC/PC
Single-mode G.652D
SC/PC 2 mm
Multi-mode A1B
FC/PC 2 mm Single-mode G.652D
LC/APC 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2

LC/APC
N/A 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
Single-mode G.657A2
LC/UPC 2 mm
Single-mode G.652D
LC/APC 1.6 mm Single-mode G.657B3
Single-mode G.657A2
SC/UPC 2 mm
Single-mode G.652D
LC/UPC
SC/APC 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
Single-mode G.657A2
2 mm
FC/UPC Single-mode G.652D
1.6 mm Single-mode G.657B3
N/A 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
Single-mode G.652D
SC/PC SC/PC 3 mm
Multi-mode A1B

Connector Fiber
Outer Mode of
Connector 1 Connector 2 Type
diameter transmission
N/A 3 mm Single-mode G.652D
SC/PC 3 mm Single-mode G.652D
3 mm Single-mode G.652D
SC/APC
SC/APC 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
0.9 mm Single-mode G.657A2

N/A
2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
LC/UPC 0.9 mm Single-mode G.652D
SC/UPC 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2

SC/UPC
0.9 mm Single-mode G.657A2
N/A
2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
Single-mode G.652D
LC/PC 2 mm
Multi-mode A1B

FC/PC
Single-mode G.652D
SC/PC 3 mm
Multi-mode A1B
N/A 3 mm Single-mode G.652D
All the optical interfaces on PTN equipment are LC interfaces. Select the fiber connector and
the fiber length according to the on-site survey.
8.1.2 Common Fiber Connectors

The common fiber connectors of the LC/PC, FC/PC, and SC/PC types are applicable to the
OptiX PTN 910.
Table 8-2 lists the types and usage of the common fiber connectors applicable to the equipment.
Table 8-2 Usage and types of fiber connectors
Type Description Usage
LC/PC Plug-in square fiber connector/ Used at the optical interfaces on all the
protruding polished boards on the OptiX PTN equipment

Type Description Usage
FC/PC Round fiber connector/protruding Used at the client-side ODF or the optical
polished interfaces on other equipment
SC/PC Square fiber connector/protruding

polished
LC/PC Fiber Connector

Figure 8-1 shows the appearance of the LC/PC fiber connector.
Figure 8-1 LC/PC fiber connector
Only axial operations instead of rotation is required to insert or remove the LC/PC fiber
connector. To insert or remove an LC/PC fiber connector, do as follows:
l To insert the fiber jumper into the LC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with
the optical interface and then push the fiber jumper with proper force into the connector.
l To remove the LC/PC fiber jumper, press the clip first, push the fiber connector inward
slightly, and then pull out the connector.
FC/PC Fiber Connector

Figure 8-2 shows the appearance of the FC/PC fiber connector.
Figure 8-2 FC/PC fiber connector

To insert or remove an FC/PC fiber connector, do as follows:
l To insert the fiber jumper into the FC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with
the optical interface carefully, to avoid any damage to the internal ceramic pipe. After
inserting the fiber jumper to the bottom of the optical interface, clockwise rotate the external
screw to tighten the fiber jumper into the optical interface.
l To remove the fiber jumper, first anticlockwise rotate the external screw of the optical
interface. When the screw is loosened, remove the fiber jumper with proper force from the
optical interface.
SC/PC Fiber Connector

Figure 8-3 shows the appearance of the SC/PC fiber connector.
Figure 8-3 SC/PC fiber connector
To insert or remove an SC/PC fiber connector, do as follows.
l To insert the fiber jumper into the SC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with
the optical interface and then push the fiber jumper with proper force into the connector.
l To remove the fiber jumper, press the clip first, push the fiber connector inward slightly,
and then pull out the connector.
8.2 -48 V Power Supply Cable

The OptiX PTN 910 uses 1 U DC connectors to receive external power.
Power cables need to be produced on site. The power cables are made of 1U DC connectors,
single cord end terminals, and wires. Figure 8-4 shows the appearance of a power cable. The
technical specifications of the power cable are listed in Table 8-3.

Figure 8-4 Appearance of the power cable

Single cord end
terminal
1U DC connector Power cable
Table 8-3 Technical specifications of the power cable
Item Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter
2.5 mm2 Electronic/Electric wire, 450 V/ Bare crimp terminal, single cord end
power cable 750V, H07Z, K, 2.5 mm2, blue/ terminal, 2.5 mm2, 12.5 A, tin plating, 8
and terminal black green, fire resistant cable mm deep, blue
with low smoke and no halogen
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX PTN 910 equipment, there are following limitations on mapping relations between
the cable length and the cross-sectional area.
If the cross-sectional area is 2.5 mm2, the maximum cable length is 50 m.
8.3 Power Cable for the EPS30-4815AF

The EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply inputs external power supplies through AC
power cables. The EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply is connected to the OptiX PTN
Structure
Figure 8-5 shows an AC input power cable connecting the mains to the EPS30-4815AF.

Figure 8-5 AC input power cable connecting the mains to the EPS30-4815AF
Figure 8-6 shows a power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the output terminal of a
storage battery.
Figure 8-6 Power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the output terminal of a storage battery
Main label
View A X2
W1 (Blue)
1
A W2 (Blue)
2
3 W3 (Black)
4 W4 (Black)
X1 X3
Figure 8-7 shows a short-circuiting cable for storage batteries.
Figure 8-7 Short-circuiting cable for storage batteries

Main label
X1 W1 X2
Figure 8-8 shows a power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the PIU.

Figure 8-8 Power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the PIU

Main label
X2
View A
W1 (Blue)
1
A W2 (Blue)
2
3 W3 (Black)
4 W4 (Black)
X1 X3
Technical Specifications
Cable Item Description
Power cable for Cable type (PI Straight Male)-(227IEC53-1.0^2(3C))-

inputting the mains (C13 Straight Female)
Technical International AC 250 V 10 A-3.00 m-3 x 1.0

specifications of the mm2-Black
cable
Fireproof class CM
Output power cable Cable type (H4(5.08))-(2 x 18UL3385 Blue + 2 x

connecting to the 18UL3385 Black)-(2 x OT2.5-6)
terminal of a storage
battery Technical Ordinary plug, 4PIN, single row /5.08 mm
specifications of the
X1 connector
Technical Electronic and Power Cable, 300 V, UL3385,

specifications of the 0.81 mm2, 18AWG, Blue, 15 A, Low Smoke
W1/W2 wire Zero Halogen Cable

specifications of the 0.81 mm2, 18AWG, Black, 15 A, Low Smoke
Technical Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 2.5mm2, M6,

specifications of the Tin Plating, Insulated Ring Terminal, 16 to
X2/X3 terminal 14AWG, Blue
Fireproof class CM
Short-circuiting Cable type (OT2.5-5)-(14UL1015 Black)-(OT2.5-5)

cable for a storage
battery Technical Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 2.5mm2, M5,

Technical Wire, 600 V, 14AWG, Black, UL1015

W1 wire
Fireproof class CM

connecting to the 18UL1015 Black)-(2 x Cord End 2.0^2
PIU Yellow (2 x 1.0))
Technical Ordinary plug, 4PIN, single row /5.08 mm

X1 connector
Technical Wire, 600 V, 18AWG, Blue, UL1015

W1/W2 wire

W3/W4 wire
Technical Naked Crimping Terminal, Twin Cord End

specifications of the Terminal, 2 mm2, Insertion Depth 8 mm, 23
X2/X3 terminal A,Tin Plating, Yellow, 2 x 1.0 mm2
Fireproof class CM
Note 1: A power cable is named in the format of "Connector 1 Type-Cable Material Type-
Connector 2 Type".
Note 2: The specifications of power cables for inputting the mains vary in different countries
or regions. In this document, the AC power cables complying with international standards are
considered as examples.
8.4 Power Cable for the ETP4830-4815AF

The ETP4830-4815AF external AC power supply inputs external power supplies through AC
power cables. The ETP4830-4815AF external AC power supply is connected to the OptiX PTN
Structure
Figure 8-9 shows an AC input power cable connecting the mains to the ETP4830-4815AF.

Figure 8-9 AC input power cable connecting the mains to the ETP4830-4815AF
Label1
X2
Main Label
Label2
W X3
Label3 X4
X1
NOTE
Various countries and regions have different AC power cable specifications. In the following example, the AC
power cable that complies with the Chinese standard is used.
Figure 8-10 shows a power cable connecting the ETP4830-4815AF to the output terminal of a
storage battery.
Figure 8-10 Power cable connecting the ETP4830-4815AF to the output terminal of a storage
battery
Main label
View A X2
W1 (Blue)
1
A W2 (Blue)
2
3 W3 (Black)
4 W4 (Black)
X1 X3
Figure 8-11 shows a short-circuiting cable for storage batteries.
Figure 8-11 Short-circuiting cable for storage batteries

Main label
X1 W1 X2
Figure 8-12 shows a power cable connecting the ETP4830-4815AF to the PIU.

Figure 8-12 Power cable connecting the ETP4830-4815AF to the PIU

Main label
X2
View A
W1 (Blue)
1
A W2 (Blue)
2
3 W3 (Black)
4 W4 (Black)
X1 X3
Power cable for Cable type (PI Straight Male)-(227IEC53-1.0^2(3C))--

inputting the mains (M4-OT terminal)
Technical International AC 250 V 10 A-3.00 m-3 x 1.0

specifications of the mm2-Black
cable
Fireproof class CM

connecting to the 18UL3385 Black)-(2 x OT2.5-6)
terminal of a storage
battery Technical Ordinary plug, 4PIN, single row /5.08 mm
X1 connector

specifications of the 0.81 mm2, 18AWG, Blue, 15 A, Low Smoke

specifications of the 0.81 mm2, 18AWG, Black, 15 A, Low Smoke
Technical Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 2.5mm2, M6,

Fireproof class CM
Short-circuiting Cable type (OT2.5-5)-(14UL1015 Black)-(OT2.5-5)

cable for a storage
battery Technical Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 2.5mm2, M5,


W1 wire
Fireproof class CM

connecting to the 18UL1015 Black)-(2 x Cord End 2.0^2
PIU Yellow (2 x 1.0))
Technical Ordinary plug, 4PIN, single row /5.08 mm

X1 connector
Technical Wire, 600 V, 18AWG, Blue, UL1015

W1/W2 wire

W3/W4 wire
Technical Naked Crimping Terminal, Twin Cord End

specifications of the Terminal, 2 mm2, Insertion Depth 8 mm, 23
X2/X3 terminal A,Tin Plating, Yellow, 2 x 1.0 mm2
Fireproof class CM
Note 1: A power cable is named in the format of "Connector 1 Type-Cable Material Type-
Connector 2 Type".
Note 2: The specifications of power cables for inputting the mains vary in different countries
or regions. In this document, the AC power cables complying with Chinese standards are
considered as examples.
8.5 PGND Cables

PGND cables are used to ground the OptiX PTN 910.
PGND cables are made of wires and OT terminals. Figure 8-13 shows the appearance of a PGND
cable. The technical specifications of the PGND cable are listed in Table 8-4.
Figure 8-13 Appearance of the PGND cable

Table 8-4 Technical specifications of the PGND cable
Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter
Power Cable, 450 V/750 V, H07Z-K UL3386, 4 Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M8, Tin Plating,
mm2,Yellow Green, Low Smoke Zero Halogen Insulated Ring Terminal, 12 to 10AWG, Yellow
Cable
Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M4, Tin Plating,
Insulated Ring Terminal, 12 to 10AWG, Yellow
Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M6, Tin Plating,
Insulated Ring Terminal, 12 to 10AWG, Yellow
8.6 Service Cables

The service cables include Ethernet cables, 75-ohm 16 x E1 cables, 120-ohm 16 x E1 cables,
and telephone wires.
8.6.1 Ethernet Cables

On the OptiX PTN 910, Ethernet cables are used to input and output Ethernet service signals.
Ethernet cables are also referred to as network cables and can be classified into straight-through
cables and crossover cables according to the connection sequence of the copper cores in the
cables.
The Ethernet service interfaces on the equipment are adaptive to the straight-through cables and
crossover cables. Hence, you can connect either type of the network cables to the Ethernet service
interfaces as required.
Ethernet cables need to be made on site.
Structure
Figure 8-14 shows the appearance of the network cable.
Figure 8-14 Appearance of the network cable

RJ45 connectors are used at both ends of a network cable. Figure 8-15 shows an RJ45 connector
and Figure 8-16 shows the structure of the network cable.
Figure 8-15 RJ45 connector

PIN#8
PIN#1
Figure 8-16 Structure of the network cable

RJ-45 network
interface connector Main Ethernet
Label 1 label cable Label 2
8 W 8
1 1
X1 X2
NOTE
For a crossover cable, pins 1 and 2 of the RJ45 connector at one end must be cross-connected to pins 3 and
6 of the RJ45 connector at the other end respectively.
Pin Assignment
Table 8-5 and Table 8-6 list the pin assignment of the network cable connector.
Table 8-5 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector
Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White-orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White-green Twisted pair

Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relation
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Table 8-6 Pin assignment of the crossover cable connector
FE Crossover Cable GE Crossover Cable
Conne Connec Color Relatio Connec Conne Color Relatio

ctor X1 tor X2 n tor X1 ctor X2 n
Pin Pin Pin Pin
X1.1 X2.1 White- Twisted X1.1 X2.3 White- Twisted

orange pair orange pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange X1.2 X2.6 Orange

green pair green pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green X1.6 X2.2 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted X1.4 X2.7 Blue Twisted

pair pair
X1.5 X2.5 White- X1.5 X2.8 White-blue
blue

brown pair brown pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown X1.8 X2.5 Brown
Table 8-7 lists the technical specifications of the network cable. For the technical specifications
of connector X1/X2, see Figure 8-16 and Figure 8-14.
Table 8-7 Technical specifications of the network cable
Item Specification
Connector Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug

X1/X2

Item Specification
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores,
PANTONE 430U
Number of Eight
cores
8.6.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables

On the OptiX PTN 910, Anea96 connectors are used to input and output 75-ohm E1 signals.
At one end of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable, the Anea96 connector is used to connect the 75-ohm
E1 electrical interface on the board; the other end is connected to the digital distribution frame
(DDF). Make the connector as required on site.
Structure
Figure 8-17 shows the appearance of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable and Figure 8-18 shows the
structure of the cable.
Figure 8-17 Appearance of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable

Figure 8-18 Structure of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable
Main label
1
W
X1 A
View A Pos.96
Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,
Female Connector
Pos .1
Pin Assignment
Table 8-8 lists the pin assignment of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable connector.
Table 8-8 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable connector
Connecto Cable Remarks Connecto Cable Remarks

r Pin r Pin
Core Serial No. Core Serial No.
1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0
2 Ring 26 Ring
3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1
4 Ring 28 Ring
5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2
6 Ring 30 Ring
7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3
8 Ring 32 Ring
9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4
10 Ring 34 Ring
11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5
12 Ring 36 Ring

Connecto Cable Remarks Connecto Cable Remarks

r Pin r Pin
Core Serial No. Core Serial No.
13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6
14 Ring 38 Ring
15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7
16 Ring 40 Ring
17 Tip 17 R8 41 Tip 18 T8
18 Ring 42 Ring
19 Tip 19 R9 43 Tip 20 T9
20 Ring 44 Ring
21 Tip 21 R10 45 Tip 22 T10
22 Ring 46 Ring
23 Tip 23 R11 47 Tip 24 T11
24 Ring 48 Ring
49 Tip 25 R12 73 Tip 26 T12
50 Ring 74 Ring
51 Tip 27 R13 75 Tip 28 T13
52 Ring 76 Ring
53 Tip 29 R14 77 Tip 30 T14
54 Ring 78 Ring
55 Tip 31 R15 79 Tip 32 T15
56 Ring 80 Ring
Shell External braid shield layer
Table 8-9 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable
Item Specification
Cable Trunk Cable, 75ohm, 16E1, 1.6 mm,Anea 96F-

I,SYFVZP75-1.1/0.26*32(S), +45deg

Item Specification
Connector Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Suite Of Female Connector And

Shielding Case, IDC Type, For 28-30 AWG Solid Wire, 1 A
Cable type Coaxial Cable, SYFVZP-MC 75-1-1*32, 75 ohm, 12.40 mm, 1.1
mm, 0.26 mm, Pantone Warm Gray 1U, Only for OEM
Diameter of the shield 12.4 mm - 1.6 mm - 0.26 mm

layer - diameter of the
internal insulation
layer - diameter of the
internal conductor
Number of cores 32
Available length 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, 50 m
8.6.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables

On the OptiX PTN 910, Anea96 connectors are used to input and output 120-ohm E1 signals.
At one end of a 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable, the Anea96 connector is used to connect the 120-ohm
E1 electrical interface on the board; the other end is connected to the DDF. Make the connector
as required on site.
Structure
Figure 8-19 shows the appearance of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable and Figure 8-20 shows the
structure of the cable.
Figure 8-19 Appearance of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable

Figure 8-20 Structure of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable
Main label
1
W
X1 A
View A Pos.96
Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,
Female Connector
Pos .1
Pin assignment
Table 8-10 lists the pin assignment of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable connector.
Table 8-10 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable connector
Connec Cable Remar Connec Cable Remar

tor Pin ks tor Pin ks
Core Relatio Tape Core Relatio Tape
nship Color nship Color
1 White Twisted Blue R0 25 White Twisted Blue T0

pair pair
2 Blue 26 Orange
3 White Twisted R1 27 White Twisted T1

pair pair
4 Green 28 Brown
5 White Twisted R2 29 Red Twisted T2

pair pair
6 Grey 30 Blue
7 Red Twisted R3 31 Red Twisted T3

pair pair
8 Orange 32 Green

pair pair
10 Brown 34 Grey
11 Black Twisted R5 35 Black Twisted T5

pair pair
12 Blue 36 Orange

Connec Cable Remar Connec Cable Remar

tor Pin ks tor Pin ks
Core Relatio Tape Core Relatio Tape
nship Color nship Color

pair pair
14 Green 38 Brown
15 Black Twisted R7 39 Yellow Twisted T7

pair pair
16 Grey 40 Blue
17 White Twisted Orange R8 41 White Twisted Orange T8

pair pair
18 Blue 42 Orange
19 White Twisted R9 43 White Twisted T9

pair pair
20 Green 44 Brown
21 White Twisted R10 45 Red Twisted T10

pair pair
22 Grey 46 Blue

pair pair
24 Orange 48 Green

pair pair
50 Brown 74 Grey

pair pair
52 Blue 76 Orange

pair pair
54 Green 78 Brown
55 Black Twisted R15 79 Yellow Twisted T15

pair pair
56 Grey 80 Blue
Shell External braid shield layer
Table 8-11 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable
Item Specification
Cable Trunk Cable, 120 ohm, 16E1, 0.4 mm, Anea 96F,
120CC32P0.4P430U(S), +45deg

Item Specification
Connector Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Suite Of Female Connector And

Shielding Case, IDC Type, For 24-26 AWG Solid Wire - 1 A
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm, 26AWG, 32Pairs,
Pantone 430U
Core diameter of the 0.4 mm

inner conductor
Number of cores 32 twisted pairs
Available length 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, 50 m
8.6.4 xDSL Cables

On the OptiX PTN 910, the telephone wires with RJ-11 connectors are used to input and output
ADSL and G.SHDSL service signals.
The connectors at both ends of the telephone wire are RJ-11 connectors.
Structure
Figure 8-21 shows the structure of the telephone wire used as an xDSL cable.
Figure 8-21 Structure of the telephone wire

1 Main label
6 W 6
1 1
X1 X2
15 m
1. Telephone wire RJ-11 crystal connector
Pin Assignment
Table 8-12 lists the pin assignment of the ADSL cable connector and Table 8-12 lists the pin
assignment of the G.SHDSL cable connector.
Table 8-12 Pin assignment of the ADSL cable connector (RJ-11)
Connector X1 Connector X2 Description
X1.1 X2.1 Unspecified

X1.3 X2.3 Ring
X1.4 X2.4 Tip
Table 8-13 Pin assignment of the G.SHDSL cable connector
X1.3 X2.3 Tip
X1.4 X2.4 Ring
Table 8-14 lists the technical specifications of the xDSL cable (telephone wire).
Table 8-14 Technical specifications of the xDSL cable
Item Specification
RJ-11 Connector X1/ Network Interface Connector, 6-Bit 4PIN, Crystal Model
X2 Connector, Matching 26-28AWG
Cable Electronic and Power Cable, 150 V,UL20251, 28AWG, Black, 1 A,

2 Cores Telephone Cable
Number of cores 2
Available length 15 m
8.7 Management Cables

On the OptiX PTN 910, Ethernet cables are used to input and output NM signals.
The management cables for the OptiX PTN 910 include Ethernet cables.

l Ethernet cables are classified into straight-through cables and crossover cables, and are
used for communication between the equipment and the NMS computer. Both the NM
interface on the equipment is adaptive to a straight-through cable or a crossover cable.
Ethernet Cables
Figure 8-22 shows an RJ45 connector used at the end of the Ethernet cable.
When the cable is connected to the ETH/OAM interface, the pin assignment of the RJ45
connector is as listed in Table 8-15; when the cable is connected to the EXT/F1 interface, the
pin assignment of the RJ45 connector is as listed in Table 8-16.
Table 8-17 lists the technical specifications of the Ethernet cable.
Figure 8-22 RJ45 connector

PIN#8
PIN#1
Table 8-15 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (ETH/OAM)
Connecto Color Relation Usage

r Pin
1 White-orange Twisted pair Transmit positive of the NM interface
2 Orange Transmit negative of the NM interface
3 White-green Twisted pair Receive positive of the NM interface
6 Green Receive negative of the NM interface
4 Blue Twisted pair Grounding end of the NM serial interface
5 White-blue Receive end of the NM serial interface
7 White-brown Twisted pair Unspecified
8 Brown Transmit end of the NM serial interface

Table 8-16 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (EXT/F1)
Connector Color Relation Usage

Pin
1 White-orange Twisted pair Transmit positive of the extended Ethernet

interface
2 Orange Transmit negative of the extended Ethernet

interface
3 White-green Twisted pair Receive positive of the extended Ethernet

interface
6 Green Receive negative of the extended Ethernet

interface
4 Blue Twisted pair Transmit positive of the 64 kbit/s

5 White-blue Transmit negative of the 64 kbit/s

7 White-brown Twisted pair Receive positive of the 64 kbit/s

8 Brown Receive negative of the 64 kbit/s

NOTE
F1 is reserved for later use.
Table 8-17 Technical specifications of the Ethernet cable
Item Specification
Connector Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8
Cores, PANTONE 430U
Number of cores Eight
8.8 Clock Cables

The clock cables used on the OptiX PTN 910 include external clock cables and 120-to-75-ohm
clock cables.
8.8.1 External Clock Cables

On the OptiX PTN 910, the external clock cables with RJ45 connectors are used to input and
output the external clock or time signals.

The external clock cables can be connected to the CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces on
the OptiX PTN 910.
Structure
Figure 8-23 shows the structure of the RJ45 connector used on the external clock cable.
Figure 8-23 Structure of the RJ45 Connector

PIN#8
PIN#1
Pin Assignment
The external clock cables must be made on the equipment installation site. When the CLK1/
TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces are used as external clock interfaces, the pin assignment of
the RJ45 connector is as listed in Table 8-18; when the CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces
are used as external time interfaces, the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector is as listed in
Table 8-19.
Table 8-18 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (external clock mode)
Connector Color Relation Description

Pin
1 White-orange Twisted pair Receive negative of CLK
2 Orange Receive positive of CLK
3 White-green Twisted pair Unspecified
6 Green Unspecified
4 Blue Twisted pair Transmit negative of CLK
5 White-blue Transmit positive of CLK
7 White- brown Twisted pair Unspecified
8 Brown Unspecified

Table 8-19 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (external time mode)
Connecto Color Relation Description

r Pin
1PPS + Time DCLS Mode
Information Mode
1 White-orange Twisted pair Unspecified Unspecified
2 Orange Unspecified Unspecified
3 White-green Twisted pair Negative of 1PPS Negative of DCLS

signals signals
6 Green Positive of 1PPS Positive of DCLS

signals signals
4 Blue Twisted pair Grounding terminal Grounding terminal
5 White-blue Grounding terminal Grounding terminal
7 White-brown Twisted pair Negative of time Unspecified

information
8 Brown Positive of time Unspecified

information
Table 8-20 lists the technical specifications of the external clock cable.
Table 8-20 Technical specifications of the external clock cable
Item Specification
Connector Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e, 0.52 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores, 4
Pairs, PANTONE 430U
Number of Eight
cores
8.8.2 Clock Bridging Cable

On the OptiX PTN 910, the 120-to-75-ohm clock cable is used as the clock bridging cable.
Structure
Figure 8-24 shows the structure of the 120-to-75-ohm clock bridging cable.

Figure 8-24 Structure of the clock bridging cable

120-ohm or 75-
ohm conversion
connector Label
Heat-shrink tube
RJ-45 Main W1
View A connector label Heat-shrink tube
8
W5 Heat-shrink tube W2
A
1
W3
X1
W4
30 m
Pin Assignment
Table 8-21 lists the pin assignment of the clock bridging cable connector.
Table 8-21 Pin assignment of the clock bridging cable connector
120-Ohm Cable 75-Ohm Cable
Connector Pin Color Relation Core No.
X1.1 Orange Twisted pair W1
X1.2 White
X1.4 Blue Twisted pair W2
X1.5 White
X1.3 Green Twisted pair W3
X1.6 White
X1.7 White Twisted pair W4
X1.8 Brown
Table 8-22 lists the technical specifications of the clock bridging cable.
Table 8-22 Technical specifications of the clock bridging cable
Item Specification
Cable Single Cable, 120 ohm To 75 ohm Clock Cable, 30 m, MP8-II,

120CC4P0.4P430U(S)+4*SYV75-2/0.34(S)

Item Specification
Connector X1 Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector

type
120-ohm cable Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm, 26AWG, 4Pairs, Pantone
type 430U
75-ohm cable Coaxial Cable, SYV-75-2-2(4.0Z)-1/0.34 mm, OD3.9 mm, Double-Layer

type Copper Braid Shielded
Cable length 30 m
8.9 Alarm Input/Output Cables

On the OptiX PTN 910, the RJ45 connectors are used to input the alarm signals from the external
equipment and output the local alarm signals to the equipment that monitors all the alarms.
At one end of the alarm input/output cable, the RJ45 connector is used to connect to the ALMI/
ALMO interface on the equipment; at the other end, a connector (made as required on site) is
used to connect to the external equipment or the equipment that monitors all the alarms.
Structure
Figure 8-25 shows the structure of the alarm input/output cable.
Figure 8-25 Structure of the alarm input/output cable

RJ-45 Connector
Main label
8 W
X1
Pin Assignment
Table 8-23 lists the pin assignment of the alarm input/output alarm cable connector.

Table 8-23 Pin assignment of the alarm input/output cable connector
Connector Color Relation Description

Pin
1 White-orange Twisted pair Alarm input 1
2 Orange Ground for alarm input 1
3 White-green Twisted pair Alarm input 2
6 Green Ground for alarm input 2
4 Blue Twisted pair Alarm input 3
5 White-blue Ground for alarm input 3
7 White- brown Twisted pair Alarm output positive
8 Brown Alarm output negative
Table 8-24 lists the technical specifications of the alarm input/output cable.
Table 8-24 Technical specifications of the alarm input/output cable
Item Specification
Connector X1 Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores,
PANTONE 430U

Hardware Description A Safety Labels
A Safety Labels
The equipment has various safety labels. This section describes the suggestions and locations
of these safety labels.
Label Description
There are labels on the chassis and boards. See Table A-1.
Table A-1 Label description
Figure Type Description
ESD protection label The label suggests the electrostatic-

sensitive equipment.
Chassis grounding label The label indicates the position of the

grounding terminal. When the equipment
is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, it is
recommended that you use the grounding
terminal specified in this label.
Chassis grounding label The label indicates the position of the

general grounding terminal. When the
equipment is installed in a cabinet rather
than a 19-inch cabinet, it is recommended
that you use the grounding terminal
specified in this label.
Fan warning label The label suggests that do not touch the fan
leaves when the fan is rotating.
Operation warning label The label indicates the precaution that

! should be taken for operations on the PIU
board. For details, see Label

Hardware Description A Safety Labels
Figure Type Description

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
Qualification label The equipment is qualified.
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司中国制造
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
Product nameplate label The label suggests the product name and
OptiX PTN 910
电源额定值 POWER RATING: -48－-60V;4A certification.
1类激光产品
N14036 Class 1 Laser Product
この装置は、クラスA情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で使用すゐ
と電波妨害を引き起こすことがぁります。この場合には使用者が適切な対策
を講ずゐよぅ要求されゐことがぁります。 VCCI-A
华为技术有限公司中国制造
HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
Label Position
Figure A-1 shows positions of labels on the chassis.
Figure A-1 Label position

OptiX PTN 910
电源额定值 POWER RATING: -48－-60V;4A
1类激光产品
Class 1 Laser Product
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD N14036
この装置は、クラス A情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で使用すゐ

と電波妨害を引き起こすことがぁります。この場合には使用者が適切な対策
を講ずゐよぅ要求されゐことがぁります。 VCCI -A
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司中国制作
HUAW EI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA 华为技术有限公司中国制造
H U A W E I TE C H N O LG I E S C O . , LTD . MADE IN CHINA

Hardware Description B Indicators
B Indicators
This section describes the names of various indicators and their indications.
Index of Indicators
For boards and their indicators, see Boards and Their Indicators.
For board status indicators, see:
l Description of the Board Status Indicator (STAT)

l Description of the Program Running Indicator (PROG)
l Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC)
l Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)
l Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWRA/PWRB)
l Description of the Fan Status Indicator (FAN)
For service port status indicators, see:
l Description of the Service Port Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicator (ACT)

l Description of the Port Status Indicators of the Ethernet Electrical Ports (LINK)
l Description of the Port Connection and Data Transmitting/Receiving Status
Indicators of the Ethernet Optical Ports (L/A)
l Description of the Ethernet Optical Port Connection Status Indicator (LINK)
l Description of the CD1 Port Status Indicator (LOS1/LOS2)
l Description of the Port Status Indicators of the ADS2 (LINK1 and LINK2)
l Description of the Port Status Indicators of the SHD4/SHD4I (LINK1, LINK2,
LINK3, and LINK4)
For system alarm indicators, see:
l Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT)

l Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ)
l Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)
For combination of indicators in different start statuses on the system control board, see
Description of the Start Status Indicator Combination on the System Control Board.

Boards and Their Indicators

Board Indicator
CXPA/CXPB STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, CRIT, MAJ, MIN
CXPG/CXPH STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, L/A1, L/A2, CRIT, MAJ, MIN
TNC1CXPI STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, CRIT, MAJ, MIN, GE L/A1 to L/

A2, FE L/A1 to L/A4, LINK, ACT
TNC2CXPI STAT, ALM, GE L/A1 to L/A2, FE L/A1 to L/A4, LINK, ACT
TNC2CXPN STAT, ALM, GE L/A1 to L/A2, FE L/A1 to L/A4, LINK, ACT
EF8T STAT, SRV
EF8F STAT, SRV, LINK1 - LINK8
EG2 STAT, SRV, LINK1, LINK2, ACT1, ACT2
EG4F STAT, SRV, L/A1 - L/A4
TND1ML1/TND1ML1A STAT, SRV
TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B STAT, SRV
MD1A/MD1B STAT, SRV
CD1 STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2
ADS2A/ASD2B STAT, SRV, LINK1, LINK2
SHD4 STAT, SRV, LINK1, LINK2, LINK3, LINK4
SHD4I STAT, SRV, LINK1, LINK2, LINK3, LINK4
PIU PWRA, PWRB
FAN FAN
Description of the Board Status Indicator (STAT)

Status Indication
On (green) The board is working normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Blinking (green) The board software is being initialized. (TNC2CXPN/

TNC2CXPI)
On (orange) The interface board is not loaded with the logic.
Off l No power is input.

l The board is not running.

Description of the Program Running Indicator (PROG)

Status Indication
On (green) l The board software is being initialized.

l The board software is normally initialized, and the board
software is running normally.
On (red) l The memory self-check fails.

l The board software or the logic file is lost.
l Loading of the board software fails.
On for 100 ms and off for Loading of the board software is in process.
100 ms alternately (green)
On for 300 ms and off for The BIOS is guiding the upper-layer software.
On for 100 ms and off for The BIOS self-check fails.

100 ms alternatively (red)
Off No power is input.
Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC)

Status Indication
On (green) l The clock works in free-run mode and the system clock
priority list is not set. By default, the system clock priority
list contains only internal sources.
l The clock works in locked mode and is tracing a clock source
other than the internal sources in the priority list.
l The system clock is working in time synchronization mode,
and the PTP time and system clock are in the tracing state.
On (red) l The system clock priority list is set. All the clock sources,
however, are lost except for the internal clock sources. The
clock works in holdover mode or free-run mode.
l The system clock is working in time synchronization mode,
but no synchronization source is available. The system clock
and PTP time are working in holdover or free-run mode.

Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)

Status Indication
On (green) Services are running normally and no service-related alarm

occurs (including the situation where the board is activated but
not configured with services).
On (red) A critical or major service-related alarm occurs.
On (orange) A minor or remote service-related alarm occurs.
Off l No power is input.

l The board is not running.
Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWRA/PWRB)

Status Indication
On (green) Power is accessed.
Off l No power is accessed.

l The power supply poles are inversely connected.
Description of the Fan Status Indicator (FAN)

Status Indication
On (green) The fans are working normally.
On (red) The fans are working abnormally.
Off The fans are not powered.
Description of the Service Port Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicator (ACT)

Status Indication
Blinking (orange) The data interface is transmitting or receiving data.
Off The data interface is not transmitting or receiving data.

Description of the Port Status Indicators of the Ethernet Electrical Ports (LINK)
Status Indication
On (green) The physical port connection is normal.
Off The physical port connection fails.
Description of the Port Connection and Data Transmitting/Receiving Status

Indicators of the Ethernet Optical Ports (L/A)
Status Indication
On (green) The connection at the physical port is normal.
Blinking (orange) The connection at the physical port is normal,

and data is received or transmitted at the port.
Off The physical connection fails.
Description of the Ethernet Optical Port Connection Status Indicator (LINK)

Status Indication
On (green) The physical connection of the port is normal.
Off The physical connection of the port is faulty.
Description of the CD1 Port Status Indicator (LOS1/LOS2)

Status Indication
On (green) The signal at the port is normal.
On (red) The signal at the port is lost.
Off The optical module is offline.
Description of the Port Status Indicators of the ADS2 (LINK1 and LINK2)
Status Indication
On (green) Physical connections at the service port are normal and links are
activated.

Status Indication
On for 300 ms and off for l The board software is normally initialized
300 ms alternately (green) l No service is accessed.
On for 100 ms and off for Service connections are being activated.
Off Cables at the service port are not connected.
Description of the Port Status Indicators of the SHD4/SHD4I (LINK1, LINK2,

LINK3, and LINK4)
Status Indication
On (green) l Physical connections at the service port are normal and links
are activated.
l The board software is being initialized.
On for 300 ms and off for Service connections are being activated.
Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT)

Status Indication
On (red) Critical alarms are generated in the equipment.
Off No critical alarms are generated in the equipment.
Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ)

Status Indication
On (orange) Major alarms are generated in the equipment.
Off No major alarms are generated in the equipment.
Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)

Status Indication
On (yellow) Minor alarms are generated in the equipment.
Off No minor alarms are generated in the equipment.

Table B-1 Description of the Alarm Indicator (ALM) on the TNC2CXPN/TNC2CXPI Board
Status Indication
On (red) Critical alarms are generated in the equipment.
On (yellow) Major or minor alarms are generated in the equipment.
off No alarms are generated in the equipment.
Description of the Start Status Indicator Combination on the System Control Board
From power on to normal running, the system control board goes through various status. Table
B-2 shows the indicator combination corresponding to these statuses.
Table B-2 Start status indicator combination
SN Status Indicator
STAT PROG SRV
1 The system control board is not Off Off Off

powered on.
2 The BIOS is being started. Off Green Off
3 The BIOS is started, and guides Off Blinking Off

and loads the board software. (green)
4 The upper-layer software is being Off Green Off

initialized.
5 The upper-layer software Green Green Off

initialization is complete, but the
system control board is not
running.
6 The system control board is Green Green Always ona

running.
NOTE
a: When the system control board is running, the SRV indicator may be in red, orange, or green. When
services are normal, the indicator is green. For other statuses of the indicator, see Description of the
Service Status Indicator (SRV).

Hardware Description C Power Consumption and Weight
C Power Consumption and Weight
This chapter lists the power consumption and weight of each board used for the OptiX PTN
910.
Table C-1 lists the power consumption and weight of boards.
Table C-1 Power consumption and weight
Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
CXPA/CXPB 1.25 43.9
CXPG/CXPH 1.32 46.8
TNC1CXPI 1.06 39.3
TNC2CXPI 1.10 30.5
TNC2CXPN 1.06 34.2
EF8T 0.53 9
EF8F 0.55 12.8
TND1EG2 0.52 5.9
TND2EG2 0.52 5.9
EG4F 0.50 13.2
TND1ML1/TND1ML1A 0.56 13.1
TND2ML1A/TND2ML1B 0.62 9.5
MD1A/MD1B 0.62 12.1
CD1 0.52 16.4
ADS2A/ADS2B 0.54 10.5(ADS2A)

10.4(ADS2B)
SHD4 0.60 7.4

Hardware Description C Power Consumption and Weight
Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
SHD4I 0.60 7.5
PIU 0.12 0.5
FAN 0.2 l Low rate: 2.3

l Medium rate: 6.1
l High rate: 17

Hardware Description D Board Configuration Parameters
D Board Configuration Parameters
You can use the U2000 to configure each parameter of the interface boards, cross-connect and
system control board.
For details how to configure each parameter of the board, see OptiX PTN 910 Configuration
Guide and the U2000 Online Help.
Parameters of the Interface Board

The configurable parameters of the interface boards are the Ethernet interface, PDH interface,
ADSL interface, G.SHDSL interface, SDH interface, path configuration, J0, J1, J2, C2, V5,
automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and spare timeslot recovery value.
l The attributes of an Ethernet interface cover the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer
3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control. To configure an Ethernet interface,
configure the physical parameters, link layer parameters, network layer parameters and
flow control schemes.
l The attributes of a PDH interface cover the general attributes, Layer 3 attributes and
advanced attributes. To configure an E1 interface, configure the physical parameters,
network layer parameters, signal frame format, clock mode and loopback scheme.
l The attributes of an ADSL interface cover the general attributes, VPI/VCI of the interface,
and enabling status of the tunnel at the virtual interface
l The attributes of a G.SHDSL interface cover the general attributes, the interface mode
(ATM mode, IMA mode and EFM mode included).
l The attributes of an SDH interface cover the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3
attributes and advanced attributes. To configure an SDH interface, configure the physical
parameters, link layer parameters and network layer parameters.
l The attributes of the path configuration cover the VC12 frame format and frame mode of
a channelized SDH interface.
l The J0 byte is continually transmitted to carry section access point identifiers, according
to which the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intended transmit end. It is
recommended to set the J0 byte to "0".
l The J1 byte is the path tracing byte. The transmit end successively transmits the higher
order access point identifiers, according to which the receive end verifies the constant

connection to the intended transmit end. When detecting mismatch of the J1 bytes, the
receive end inserts the HP_TIM alarm in the corresponding path.
l The J2 byte is a VC-12 path tracing byte. The transmit end successively transmits the lower
order access point identifiers based on the negotiation of the two ends. According to these
access point identifiers, the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intended
transmit end in this path.
l The C2 byte is the signal label byte, which indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC
frames and the payload property. The received C2 should be consistent with the transmitted
C2. If the C2 bytes are mismatched, the local end inserts the HP_SLM alarm in the
corresponding VC-4 path.
Table D-1 lists the mapping relation between the service type and setting of the C2.
Table D-1 Mapping relation between the service type and C2 byte
Input Service Type C2 Byte (in Hex)
TUG structure 02
ATM mapping 13
HDLC, PPP framed signal mapping 16
Unequipped 00
l As a path status and signal identification byte, the V5 byte detects the bit error and indicates
the remote fault and failure in the lower order path. Table D-2 lists the mapping relation
between the service type and V5 byte.
Table D-2 Mapping relation between the service type and V5 byte
Input Service Type V5 Byte (in Hex)
Asynchronization 02
Unequipped or supervisory unequipped 00
l To configure the ALS is to set the parameters of the optical interface.

l To ensure the valid utilization of the path, the spare timeslots are eliminated when the
signals are encapsulated into the network. In this way, the TDM frame is partially stuffed.
To recover the TDM frame at the service sink, the spare timeslots eliminated during
encapsulation are added again.
Parameters of the Cross-Connect and System Control Board

The configurable parameters of the cross-connect and system control board are the environment
monitor interface, the external time interface and the phase-locked source output by external
clock.
You can set the relay control mode and enable or disable the major alarm relay and critical alarm
relay to configure the environment monitor interface.

You can set the basic Attribute, BMC, and Cable Transmitting Distance to configure the external
time interface.
You can set the output mode, output timeslot, output threshold, failure condition and failure
action of the 2M phase-locked source external clock

Hardware Description E Glossary
E Glossary
Numerics
1+1 hot backup A backup mode in which two systems with the same functions are deployed, one in the
active state and the other in the standby state with power on. The standby system backs
up the data of the active system automatically. Once the active system encounters a fault,
the standby system takes over the service of the active system automatically or by manual
intervention.
1000BASE-T Twisted cable with the transmission speed as 1000 Mbit/s and the transmission distance
as 100 m.
100BASE-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network
over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair
(STP) wire.
10BASE-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 10 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network
over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair
(STP) wire.
AAL See ATM Adaptation Layer

ABR See available bit rate
AC See attachment circuit
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
ACL See access control list
active link In the link aggregation group, the links connected to active interfaces are active links.
active/standby A troubleshooting technology. When an active device becomes faulty, services and
switchover control functions are automatically switched over to the standby device to ensure the
normal running of the services and functions.
address pool A set of IP addresses assigned by Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) or an
organization tied to IANA.

Address Resolution Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to
Protocol MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.
administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore
product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line
advanced ACL An advanced ACL can define ACL rules based on the source addresses, target addresses,
protocol type, such as TCP source or target port, the type of the ICMP protocol, and
message codes.
AF See assured forwarding
aggregated link Multiple signaling link sets between two nodes.
aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or
conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
AIS See alarm indication signal
alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network
Management System (NMS) . Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the
details of the alarm.
alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
alarm cause A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault cause
is the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that is
representative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem.
alarm clearance An operation performed on an alarm. Through this operation, the status of an alarm is
changed from uncleared to cleared, which indicates that the fault causing the alarm has
been rectified.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.

alarm inversion For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can be
used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference.
The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (not
inverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarm
inversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion mode
of NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whatever
the inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set to
automatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then the
alarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port will
automatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has already
been configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoid
generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When the
alarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversion
status of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported.
alarm mask On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions for
the system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meeting
the conditions.
alarm name Alarm name is a brief description of the symptom of the failure related to this alarm.
Alarm notification When an error occurs, the performance measurement system sends performance alarms
to the destination (for example, a file and/or fault management system) designated by
users.
alarm parameter Alarm parameters describe the location where the fault has occurred. For example, for
an alarm on a board, the parameters include the shelf ID, slot ID and port ID.
alarm severity The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T
recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning.
alarm status The devices in the network report traps to the Network Management System (NMS),
which displays the alarm statuses in the topological view. The status of an alarm can be
critical, major, minor and prompt.
alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown
APS See automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
AS See Autonomous System
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.

asymmetric digital A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone
subscriber line lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides
continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most
of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive
information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice)
information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from
512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps.
asynchronization Asynchronization does not use the exact data signals timed by the clock. The signals
have different frequencies and phases. The asynchronization usually encapsulates the
bits into the control flag, which specifies the beginning and end of the bits.
Asynchronous A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.
Transfer Mode A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in
the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.
Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM Adaptation An interface between higher-layer protocols and the Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Layer (ATM). The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various types of
information, including voice, video, and data.
ATM PVC ATM permanent virtual circuit
attachment circuit The physical or virtual circuit attaching a CE to a PE.
attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
AU See administrative unit
auto-negotiation An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to
automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.
automatic laser A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters
shutdown and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic protection Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch
switching to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
Autonomous System A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technology
administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer ranging
from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas.
available bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
B
B-ISDN See Broadband Integrated Services Digital Networks
backward Pertaining to signals or operations propagating in the opposite direction relative to the
call set-up.
backward defect When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)
indication to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks
with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides
the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power
control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one
or more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic
and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio
equipment, and the antenna.
Basic ACL A basic ACL can define ACL rules based on only source addresses.
basic input/output A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control
system programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
bayonet-neill- A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
concelman
BC See boundary clock
BDI See backward defect indication
BE See best effort
BER See bit error rate
best effort A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
BFD See bidirectional forwarding detection
BGP See Border Gateway Protocol
bidirectional A simple Hello protocol, similar to the adjacent detection in the route protocol. Two
forwarding detection systems periodically send BFD detection messages on the channel between the two
systems. If one system does not receive the detection message from the other system for
a long time, you can infer that the channel is faulty. Under some conditions, the TX and
RX rates between systems need to be negotiated to reduce traffic load.
BIOS See basic input/output system
BIP See bit-interleaved parity
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.

bit-interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, and so on. Even parity is generated by
setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition
of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position
within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion
includes the BIP-X.
BITS See building integrated timing supply
BMC best master clock
BNC See bayonet-neill-concelman
Border Gateway An interautonomous system routing protocol. An autonomous system is a network or
Protocol group of networks under a common administration and with common routing policies.
BGP is used to exchange routing information for the Internet and is the protocol used
between Internet service providers (ISP).
boundary clock A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit
bridge protocol data The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
unit uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
Broadband Integrated A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice.
Services Digital It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at
Networks 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadband TV Broadband TV involves accessing multimedia content via a broadband connection and
viewing it on a normal TV.
broadcast address In computer networking, a broadcast address is a network address that allows information
to be sent to all nodes on a network, rather than to a specific network host.
broadcast domain A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device
within the group. Broadcasts do not pass through a router, which bound the domains. In
addition, the set of ports between which a device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or
unknown destination frame.
BSC See base station controller
BTS See base transceiver station
BTV See broadband TV
building integrated In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
timing supply a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.

bus A path or channel for signal transmission. The typical case is that, the bus is an electrical
connection that connects one or more conductors. All devices that are connected to a
bus, can receive all transmission contents simultaneously.
cable distribution plate A component which is used to arrange the cables in order.
cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.
CAR See committed access rate
carrier sense multiple A network access method in which devices that are ready to transmit data first check the
access/ collision channel for a carrier. If no carrier is sensed, a device can transmit. If two devices transmit
detection at once, a collision occurs and each computer backs off and waits a random amount of
time before attempting to retransmit. This is the access method used by Ethernet.
CBR See constant bit rate
CBS See committed burst size
CC See connectivity check
CCF See connection control function
CCM See continuity check message
CDR clock and data recovery
CDV cell delay variation
CDVT See cell delay variation tolerance
CE See customer edge
cell delay variation This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressive
tolerance sending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does not
apply to end-systems.
cell loss priority Field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped if
the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is unlikely
to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be dropped.
CEP circuit emulation over packet
CES See circuit emulation service
CF See compact flash
CFM See connectivity fault management
chain network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two
or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second.
CID See connection identifier
CIR See committed information rate

circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
service transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
CIST See common and internal spanning tree
CLNP connectionless network protocol
clock synchronization A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588
compliant with V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control
precision time protocol system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
CLP See cell loss priority
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM
does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
common and internal The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical
spanning tree continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP
to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
common spanning tree A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST region
is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be regarded as their spanning tree
generated with STP/RSTP.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service
efficiency.
congestion A flow control measure to solve the problem of network resource competition. When
management the network congestion occurs, it places the packet into the queue for buffer and
determines the order of forwarding the packet.

connection control The set of functions used for setting up, maintaining and releasing a communication path
between two or more users or a user and a network entity, for example a dual tone multi-
frequency receiver.
connection control A functional entity in the distributed functional plane of the intelligent network (IN)
function conceptual model, which provides the basic call services of the bearer (telecom) network
and the advanced switch-based services with the call processing and controlling
functions.
connection identifier The MAC layer defined in the IEEE802.16 protocol is based on connection. Each
connection is uniquely identified with a CID.
connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
connectivity fault Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) is an end-to-end per-service-instance
management Ethernet layer operation, administration, and management (OAM) protocol. It includes
proactive connectivity monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation for large
Ethernet metropolitan-area networks (MANs) and WANs.
constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
constraint shortest path An extension of shortest path algorithms like OSPF and IS-IS. The path computed using
first CSPF is a shortest path fulfilling set of constrains. It simply means that it runs shortest
path algorithm after pruning those links that violate a given set of constraints. A
constraint could be minimum bandwidth required per link (also know as bandwidth
guaranteed constraint), end-to-end delay, maximum number of links traversed and so
on. CSPF is widely used in MPLS Traffic Engineering. The routing using CSPF is known
as Constraint Based Routing (CBR).
constraint-based An Label Switched Path set up based on certain constraints is called Constraint-based
routed label switched Routed Label Switched Path (CR-LSP).
path
continuity check CCM is used to detect the link status.
message
control plane The control plane performs the call control and connection control functions. Through
signaling, the control plane sets up and releases connections, and may restore a
connection in case of a failure. The control plane also performs other functions in support
of call and connection control, such as routing information dissemination.
control word A 4-byte encapsulated packet header. It is used to transmit packets in an MPLS packet
switching network.
convergence layer The convergence layer is a "bridge" between the access layer and the core layer. It
provides the convergence and forwarding functions for the access layer. It processes all
the traffic from the access layer devices, and provides the uplinks to the core layer.
Compared with the access layer, the convergence layer devices should have higher
performances, fewer interfaces and higher switching rate. In the real network, the
convergence layer refers to the network between UPEs and PE-AGGs.

core layer The core layer functions as the backbone of high speed switching for networks, and it
provides high speed forwarding communications. It has a backbone transmission
structure that provides high reliability, high throughput, and low delay. The core layer
devices must have a good redundancy, error tolerance, manageability, adaptability, and
they support dual-system hot backup or load balancing technologies. In a real network,
the core layer includes the IP/MPLS backbone network consisting of NPEs and backbone
routers.
CPE See customer premises equipment
CPN customer premises network
CR-LSP See constraint-based routed label switched path
CRC See cyclic redundancy check
crossover cable A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from one
piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice versa.
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access/ collision detection
CSPF See constraint shortest path first
CST See common spanning tree
CTD cell transfer delay
current alarm An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.
current performance Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers,
data namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of a
performance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data only
in the specified monitoring period.
customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
customer premises Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) is equipment located at an end-user's premises.
equipment Most CPEs are telephones or other service equipment. A CPE can be a Mobile Station
(MS) or a Subscriber Station (SS). An MS is mobile equipment, and an SS is fixed
equipment.
CV connectivity verification
CW See control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancy A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
check a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data
network Communication Function (DCF).
data communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
channel transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
data connection Data connection equipment including analog, DSL, ISDN, cable modem circuits.
equipment
data link layer Layer 2 in the open system interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that provides
services to transfer data over the transmission link between open systems.
data terminal A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE
equipment equipment (for example, model) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE.
Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,
UDP datagram.
DC See direct current
DCC See data communications channel
DCE See data connection equipment
DCN See data communication network
DDF See digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network
DE See discard eligible
DEI See drop eligible indicator
delay variation A component of cell transfer delay, which is induced by buffering.
dense wavelength Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of
division multiplexing single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing
as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.
desired Min Tx interval The minimum interval that the local system would like to use when transmitting BFD
control packets.
Detection multiplier The desired detect time multiplier for BFD control packets. It determines the session
detection time together with the DMTI and RMRI.
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHCP Relay Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol relay (DHCP relay) is a function that enables
forwarding of DHCP data between the device that requests the IP address and the DHCP
server.
DHCP Server A program that allocates the IP addresses of the local address pool to the users at the
user side and allocates the IP addresses of the relay address pool to the users that pass
through the DHCP proxy at the network side.

differentiated services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series
of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-
hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning
functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
DiffServ See differentiated services
digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital distribution A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
frame transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital subscriber line A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the local
telephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines without
affecting the POTS service.
digital subscriber line A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that
access multiplexer receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and
puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.
direct current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or
change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports
the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic
exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the
case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
Discrete service The cross-connection that exists on an NE but cannot form trails on the network
management system.
dispersion The dependence of refraction on the wavelength of light. Different wavelengths are
transmitted in an optical medium at different speeds. Wavelengths reach the end of the
medium at different times. As a result, the light pulse spreads and the dispersion occurs.
DLL See data link layer
DMTI See desired Min Tx interval
DNI See dual node interconnection
DNS See domain name service
domain name service A hierarchical naming system for computers, services, or any resource connected to the
Internet or a private network. It associates various information with domain names
assigned to each of the participants. The Domain Name System distributes the
responsibility of assigning domain names and mapping those names to IP addresses by
designating authoritative name servers for each domain.
DRDB dynamic random database
drop eligible indicator DEI indicates the eight transmission precedence in the PRI field can be combined with
drop precedence.
DS See dynamic service

DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a
domain that is not DS-capable.
DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of
network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides
point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSL See digital subscriber line
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer
DTE See data terminal equipment
dual homing A network topology in which a device is connected to the network at two independent
access points. One point is the primary connection and the other a standby connection
that is activated in the event of a failure of the primary connection.
dual node DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case
interconnection of an interconnection failure scenario.
dual-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected
entity (for example "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing
Dynamic Host Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol.
Configuration Protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host
requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet
network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
dynamic service A term used in IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) 802.16 networks
to describe a set of messages and protocols that allow a base station and subscriber station
to add, modify, or delete the characteristics of s service flow.
E
E-LAN See Ethernet LAN
E-Tree See Ethernet-tree
E1 A European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides 32 x
64 kbit/s channels.
EBS See excess burst size
ECC See embedded control channel
Edge LSR The basic unit of the MPLS network is LSR. The network composed by LSR is named
MPLS domain. LSR is located at the edge of the MPLS domain. LSR used to connect
other user network is named Label Edge Router (LER). The LSR in the core of the
internal area is the core LSR. The core LSR can be the router that supports MPLS and
be the ATM-LSR generated after the ATM switch is ungraded. LSRs in the domain
communicated by MPLS.
EF See expedited forwarding

EFM See Ethernet in the first mile

EGP See Exterior Gateway Protocol
Egress The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is
labeled. The egress LER is named Egress.
electromagnetic Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications
compatibility equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
interference limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electromagnetic The process of limiting the coupling of an electromagnetic field between two locations.
shielding Typically, it is applied to enclosures, separating electrical circuits from external
surroundings, and to cables, separating internal wires from the surroundings that the
cable passes through.
electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
channel to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See electromagnetic interference
EMS See electromagnetic shielding
Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
EPL See Ethernet private line
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service
error tolerance The ability of a system or component to continue normal operation despite the presence
of erroneous inputs.
errored frame second A one-second interval during which at least one errored frame is detected.
ESD See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
ETH-LT Ethernet link trace
Ethernet in the first Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the
mile advantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM
provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In
addition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV)
and Video On Demand (VOD).
Ethernet LAN A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
virtual connection).

Ethernet private LAN An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a
service dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet virtual A service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.
private LAN
Ethernet virtual An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
private LAN service bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet-tree An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual
Connection.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
EVPLn See Ethernet virtual private LAN
excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The
protection switching is not really performed.
EXP See experimental bits
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify
the CoS of the MPLS packet.
Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network
segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.
Exterior Gateway A protocol for exchanging routing information between two neighbor gateway hosts
Protocol (each with its own router) in a network of autonomous systems.
extra traffic The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for
the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.

F
fair queue A mechanism for queue scheduling in which network resource is allocated equally and
delay and jitter time of all traffic are optimized.
fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
fast reroute A technology to locally protect MPLS TE network. Only the interface with the speed of
100 Mbps can support FRR. If the switching speed of FRR can reach 50ms, the packet
loss decreases when some faults occur on the network. FRR is applicable to services that
are very sensitive to packet loss and delay. When a fault is detected at the lower layer,
the lower layer informs the upper routing system of the fault. Then the routing system
forwards packets through a backup link. In this manner, the impact of the link fault on
services is minimized. FRR is local and temporary. Once the protected LSP recovers or
a new LSP is set up, traffic is switched to the original or the new LSP. After you configure
FRR on LSP and some link or some node on LSP is invalid, traffic is switched to the
protected link and a new LSP is trying to be set up on the LSP ingress.
FDI See forward defect indication
FE See fast Ethernet
FEC See forwarding equivalence class
FF See fixed filter style
FFD fast failure detection
FFD packet FFD is a path failure detection method independent from CV. Different from a CV
packet, the frequency for generating FFD packets is configurable to satisfy different
service requirements. An FFD packet contains information the same as that in a CV
packet. The destination end LSR processes FFD packets in the same way for processing
CV packets.
FIB See forward information base
fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmable A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO See first in first out queuing
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
filler panel A piece of board to cover vacant slots, to keep the frame away from dirt, to keep proper
airflow inside the frame, and to beautify the frame appearance.

first in first out queuing A queuing policy that features that the packet reaching earlier can be allocated resource
firstly.
fixed filter style On an MPLS network, an RSVP node creates a distinct reservation for data packets from
a particular sender. This sender does not share its resource reservation with other senders.
flash memory A type of special electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) and
can be erased and rewritten in blocks at a time instead of only one byte. The data shored
in flash memory will not be lost if the flash memory is powered off.
flow control A set of mechanisms used to prevent the network from being overloaded by regulating
the input rate transmissions.
flow queue The same type of services of a user is considered one service flow; HQoS performs queue
scheduling according to the services of each user. The service flows of each user are
classified into four FQs, namely, CS, EF, AF, and BE. CS is assigned a traffic shaping
percentage for Priority Queuing (PQ); EF, AF, and BE are assigned weights for Weighted
Fair Queuing (WFQ). The preceding two scheduling modes occupy a certain bandwidth
each; they can act at the same time without interfering each other.
Forward It is the direction that traffic flows along the detected LSP.
forward defect Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the
indication LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the
defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected
higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward information In data communication, a table of information that provides network hardware (bridges
base and routers) with the directions needed to forward packets of data to locations on other
networks. The information contained in a routing table differs according to whether it is
used by a bridge or a router. A bridge relies on both the source (originating) and
destination addresses to determine where and how to forward a packet.
forwarding equivalence As a class-based forwarding technology, MPLS classifies the packets with the same
class forwarding mode, and the process is called Forwarding Equivalence Class. Packets with
the same FEC are processed similarly on an MPLS network. It is flexible to divide FECs,
and it can be a combination of the source address, the destination address, the source
port, the destination port, the protocol type, the VPN, and so on.
Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can
be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA See field programmable gate array
FPS PW fast protection switching (FPS) achieves dual-homing protection for E-Line services.
FQ See fair queue
FR See frame relay
frame relay A packet-switching protocol for use on WANs (wide area networks). Frame relay
transmits variable-length packets at up to 2 Mbps over predetermined, set paths known
as PVCs (permanent virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but dispenses with some of
X.25's error detection for the sake of speed. See also ATM (definition 1), X.25.

Free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by
the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this
mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external
reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously
connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects
the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates
when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.
FRR See fast reroute
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both
directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line
telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard
at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with
one lane for each direction.
Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used
to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the
gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot
identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP
networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the
network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
gateway network A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
element the NM application layer
GE See gigabit Ethernet
generic framing A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
procedure standardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic routing Applied to the encapsulation of IP datagrams tunneled through the internet, GRE is a
encapsulation mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network. GRE
serves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol, and provides a tunnel for transparently
transmitting data packets.
GFP See generic framing procedure
gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System timing services to worldwide users.
global system for The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by ETSI (European
mobile Telecommunications Standards Institute).
communications

GND Ground
GNE See gateway network element
GPS See Global Positioning System
GR See graceful restart
graceful restart In IETF, protocols related to Internet Protocol/Multiprotocol Label Switching (IP/
MPLS) such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Intermediate System-Intermediate
System (IS-IS), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label Distribution Protocol (LDP),
and Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) are extended to ensure that the forwarding
is not interrupted when the system is restarted. This reduces the flapping of the protocols
at the control plane when the system performs the active/standby switchover. This series
of standards is called graceful restart.
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GRE See generic routing encapsulation
GSM See global system for mobile communications
GUI See graphical user interface
half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both
directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party
begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before
replying.
Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface
to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
HDSL high-speed digital subscriber line
hello packet It is the commonest packet which is periodically sent by a router to its neighbors. It
contains DR, Backup Designated Router (BDR), the known neighbors and the values of
timers.
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
Packet Access for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
higher order path In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower
order path layers.
History Performance The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported
Data and stored in the NMS.
Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the
tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hot plugging A technology used to improve the reliability and maintainability of a system. It ensures
that the system performance is not affected when a board is inserted and removed during
system running.

hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and
storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When
the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in
the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire
system.
HP See higher order path
HSB See hot standby
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access
I
I/O input/output
IANA See Internet assigned numbers authority
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol
IE See information element
IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,
the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IGP See Interior Gateway Protocol
IGRP See Interior Gateway Routing Protocol
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM
IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame
defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links
in an IMA group.
information element An Information Element is a group of information which may be included within a
signaling message or data flow which is sent across an interface. Examples may include
QoS (Quality of Service) definitions, setup parameters, user identifiers and so on.
Ingress The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is
labeled. The ingress LER is named Ingress.
Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect
unit.
Institute of Electrical A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
and Electronics boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
Engineers electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

integrated services A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for the
digital network voice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on a
small number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensive
transmission service.
Interior Gateway A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in small-
Protocol sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing information
protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP
(EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
Interior Gateway A routing protocol from Cisco that was developed in 1988 to overcome the shortcomings
Routing Protocol of RIP. IGRP takes bandwidth, latency, reliability and current traffic load into
consideration. It is typically used within an autonomous system, such as an Internet
domain. IGRP was superseded by Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP).
internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
International The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-
Electrotechnical governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.
Commission
International A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
Telecommunication bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
Union radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet assigned The organization operated under the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
numbers authority allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also
maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including
autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
Message Protocol other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.
Task Force Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
Management Protocol the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

Internet protocol In the Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) system, video is transmitted in IP packets.
television Also called "TV over IP", IPTV uses streaming video techniques to deliver scheduled
TV programs or video-on-demand (VOD). Unlike transmitting over the air or through
cable to a TV set, IPTV uses the transport protocol of the Internet for delivery and requires
either a computer and software media player or an IPTV set-top box to decode the images
in real time.
Internet Protocol The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
version 4 assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together
are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the
network or subnetwork.
Internet protocol A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
version 6 and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet service An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
provider
interworking A way to connect telecom devices so that they can communicate with each other.
inverse multiplexing The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-
over ATM multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher
bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is
referred to as an IMA group.
IP See Internet Protocol
IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to
the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets.
An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values
of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the
IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identify
the host itself.
IP Protocol IP protocol refers to a protocol suite consisting of a series of standards that enables a
data packet to be transmitted to its destination through the Internet. IP protocol provides
a connectionless data packet transmission mechanism, shields physical network
transmission, addresses IP, and selects routes.
IPTV See Internet protocol television
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4
IPv6 See Internet protocol version 6
ISDN See integrated services digital network
ISP See Internet service provider
IST See internal spanning tree
ITU See International Telecommunication Union

J
jumper A connection wire for connecting two pins.
L
L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network
Label distribution Packets with the same destination address belong to an FEC. A label out of an MPLS
label resource pool is allocated to the FEC. LSRs record the relationship of the label and
the FEC. Then, LSRs send a message and advertises to upstream LSRs about the label
and FEC relationship in message. The process is called label distribution.
Label Distribution A protocol defined for distributing labels in MPLS network. It is the set of procedures
Protocol and messages by which Label Switched Routers (LSRs) establish Label Switched Paths
(LSPs) through a network by mapping network-layer routing information directly to
data-link layer switched paths. More information about the applicability of LDP can be
found in [RFC3037].
label edge router A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assign
labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
Label space Value range of the label allocated to peers.
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
label switching router Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN See local area network
LAN switch It is a piece of equipment used to allocate communication links in a LAN.
Layer 2 Multicast When Ethernet is used as the link layer, Layer 2 multicast uses multicast MAC addresses
for traffic transmission. Therefore, a technology must exist to map the IP multicast
address to the multicast MAC address.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet
network switched (IP/MPLS) network.
LB See loopback
LBM See loopback message
LBR See loopback reply

LC Lucent connector
LCT local craft terminal
LDP See Label Distribution Protocol
LDP peer Two LSRs that use LDP to exchange labels or FEC mappings. LDP sessions exist
between them.
LER See label edge router
limit rate A traffic management technology used to limit the total rate of packet sending on a
physical interface or a Tunnel interface. LR is directly enabled on the interface to control
the traffic passing the interface.
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link Aggregation A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to
Control Protocol increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE
802.3ad.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
Link Control Protocol In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes,
configures, and tests data-link Internet connections.
Link Group According to some principles, links are divided into the set in the logical term. A set of
links is called the link group. The division makes management more convenient.
Link Layer Discovery The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is an L2D protocol defined in IEEE 802.1ab.
Protocol Using the LLDP, the NMS can rapidly obtain the Layer 2 network topology and changes
in topology when the network scales expand.
Link Monitoring Link monitoring is a mechanism for an interface to notify the peer of the fault when the
interface detects that the number of errored frames, errored codes, or errored frame
seconds reaches or exceeds the specified threshold.
Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,
the link protection should be provided.
link state The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is the
advertisement condition of the link.
link state database A database containing the states of all the links.
Link status The running status of a link, which can be Up, Down, backup, or unknown.
linktrace message The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP
is called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC
address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is
called Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the
TTL of LTM minus 1.
LLC See logical link control

LLDP See Link Layer Discovery Protocol

LLID locate loopback ID
LMP link management protocol
LMSP linear multiplex section protection
load sharing A device running mode. Two or more hardware units can averagely share the system
load according to their processing capabilities when they work normally. When a
hardware unit becomes faulty, the other units fulfill the tasks of the faulty unit on the
precondition of guaranteeing the system performance, for example, few call loss.
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Lock status Services are not switched to the protection board or channel when a fault occurs, if
currently no switching takes place. If currently the switching takes place, after the
working board or channel recovers to normal, the services are not switched back to the
working board or channel.
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
LOF See Loss Of Frame
logical link control According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper
sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media
(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
LOM loss of multiframe
loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
loopback message The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the destination
node. LBM message carries its own sending time.
loopback reply For 802.2ag MAC Ping, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LBM, and the response message is
called Loopback Reply. The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time
of LBM and the sending time of LBR.
LOP See loss of pointer
LOS See Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead
indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor
the performance of the PHY layer.
loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the
PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of
cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
low priority queuing LPQ is performed after WFQ. It also means the device schedules queues strictly based
on the priority of queues.
Lower subrack The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.
Lower Threshold When the performance event count value is smaller than a certain value, a threshold-
crossing event occurs. The value is the lower threshold.
LP lower order path
LPQ See low priority queuing
LPT link-state pass through
LR See limit rate
LSA See link state advertisement
LSDB See link state database
LSP See label switched path
LSP tunnel For an LSP, after a label is assigned to an FEC on the ingress, the label determines the
traffic forwarding. The traffic is transparent to the intermediate nodes. In this sense, an
LSP can be regarded as an LSP tunnel.
LSR See label switching router
LSS loss of sequence synchronization
LT linktrace
LTM See linktrace message
LTR See linktrace reply
M
MA See maintenance association
MAC See media access control
MAC address learning Service that characterizes a learning bridge, in which the source MAC address of each
received packets is stored so that future packets destined for that address can be
forwarded only to the bridge interface on which that address is located. Packets destined
for unrecognized addresses are forwarded out every bridge interface. This scheme helps
minimize traffic on the attached LANs. MAC address learning is defined in the IEEE
802.1 standard.
main distribution A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
frame
mains supply The commercial power supply of a nation. In China, the nominal voltage of the mains
supply is 220 V AC and the frequency is 50 Hz.
maintenance That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the
association connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.

maintenance A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service
association end point Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an
end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance
Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.
maintenance A CFM Entity, associated with a specific pair of ISS Service Access Points or EISS
association Service Access Points, which reacts and responds to CFM frames. It is associated with
intermediate point a single Maintenance Association, and is an intermediate point within one or more
Maintenance Entities.
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
MAN See metropolitan area network
Management right The right enabling a user to manage the specified devices and boards or the group of a
user to manage specified domains.
manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
master-slave In the master-slave mode, a designated master clock disseminates its frequency reference
synchronization to all other slave clocks.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
unit depending on the network, 576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF See message communication function
MCR See minimum cell rate
MD See maintenance domain
MD5 See message digest algorithm 5
MDF See main distribution frame
MDP See message dispatch processor
Mean Time Between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
Failures of the reliability of the system.
Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
media gateway A logical entity that converts the format of the media of a network to meet the format
requirement of another network. It can process audio services, video services and data
services, and convert the media format in full duplex mode. In addition, it can play certain
audio and video signals, and provide the IVR function and media conference.
MEP See maintenance association end point
merge point The LSR where one or more backup tunnels rejoin the path of the protected LSP
downstream of the potential failure. The same LSR may be both an MP and a PLR
simultaneously.
message The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management
communication information with their prs.
function
message digest A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message
algorithm 5 integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128
bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian
integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which
are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.
message dispatch The MDP roughly processes the received messages, and then sends the messages to the
processor destinations.
metropolitan area A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer
network resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local
area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).
The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger
network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is
also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them
with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
MGW See media gateway
microwave The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum with much longer wavelengths than infrared
radiation, typically above about 1 mm.
minimum cell rate Minimum Cell Rate (MCR). Parameter defined by the ATM Forum for ATM traffic
management. MCR is defined only for Available Bit Rate (ABR) transmissions, and
specifies the minimum value for the ACR.
MIP See maintenance association intermediate point
mirror It is an action to store a copy of a file to another archive site to release the load of the
original site, or to provide an archive site closer to the users geographically.
MLD See multicast listener discovery

MLPPP See Multi-link Point to Point Protocol

MP See merge point
MP See maintenance point
MP-BGP See Multi-protocol Extensions for Border Gateway Protocol
MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In
this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of
different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault
detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and
relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-
LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.
In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through
multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group
of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two
identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely
define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or
FILTER_SPEC object.
MS See multiplex section
MSP See multiplex section protection
MST See multiplex section termination
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR See Mean Time To Repair
MTU See maximum transmission unit
Multi-link Point to A protocol used in ISDN connections. MLPPP lets two B channels act as a single line,
Point Protocol doubling connection rates to 128 kbit/s.
Multi-protocol A multi-protocol extension of BGP-4. MP-BGP supports multiple network layer
Extensions for Border protocols and identifies the protocols based on address families. MP-BGP transmits VPN
Gateway Protocol composition information and VPN-IPv4 routes between PEs.
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
multicast group A set of members participating in the packet multicast service. The multicast group is
defined by a rule (or set of rules) which identifies a collection of members implicitly or
explicitly. This rule may associate members for the purpose of participating in a call, or
may associate members who do not participate in data transfer but do participate in
management, security, control, and accounting for the multicast group.

multicast listener The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
discovery connected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6
networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which
the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the
multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiple spanning tree Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP
instance within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for
frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST
Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
Multiple Spanning Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
Tree Protocol algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple Spanning The MST region consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among
Tree Region them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST
region attributes belong to the same MST region. The attributes for the same MST region
are as follows: Same region name Same revision level Same mapping between the VLAN
ID to MSTI
multiplex section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
protection including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiplex section The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH frame
termination signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
Multiservice capability It specifies whether multiple services can be independently processed during a session.
N
NA See network address
NCP See Network Control Protocol
NE database There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following: (1) DRDB: a dynamic
database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery; (2) SDB: a static database in a power-
down RAM; (3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM. In efficient
operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same time.
Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB to
FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database is restored
in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, the main control
restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due to the exhaustion
of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.

NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a
unique NE ID.
NE side The NE configuration data saved on the SCC board of the equipment, which can be
uploaded to the network management system and then stored in databases on the network
management system NE side.
network address On the Internet, addresses are based on the IP protocol, which uses a 32-bit code in the
IP header to identify host addresses.
Network Control This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implements
Protocol path control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link.
Network diameter The maximum of network bridges that the communication passes through between any
two terminal devices in the switched network.
Network entity Network entity refers to the universal basic devices used to describe the functions and
structure of the transmission network, which considerably facilitates the description of
the network. The network entities include transmission object and sub-network.
network layer The network layer is layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The
network layer provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are
interconnected. In addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic
control. In the TCP/IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified
and implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
System
network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.
network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all
nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
point access OSI network services.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast
packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality
and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by net
Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. It
synchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client.
network unit layer The logical layer that implements the configuration, failure and performance for a single
network element in the layered management architecture of the telecom network
management system.
NMS See Network Management System
NHOP next-hop
NNI See network node interface
Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to
protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to
protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR.

NPC network parameter control

NRT non-real-time
NSAP See network service access point
NSF not stop forwarding
NTP See Network Time Protocol
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance

OAMPDU oam protocol data unit
ODF See optical distribution frame
OOF See out of frame
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.
Open Systems A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by
Interconnection different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation log The Operations Log is a list of information about operation events.
operation, A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
administration and activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
maintenance location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source
(or a detector).+
optical distribution A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
frame
optical fiber A thin filament of glass or other transparent material, through which a signal-encoded
light beam may be transmitted using total internal reflection.
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF See open shortest path first
out of frame An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specified
number of consecutive frame bit positions.
Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without
changing the structure of the signals.

overcurrent protection A circuit protection technology. When there is a great volume of traffic on a circuit and
the current is stronger than the protection threshold, the circuit is cut off after the circuit
protector timer expires.
overhead cabling Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
P
P A backbone device that is located in the service provider network. A P device is not
directly connected to the CE devices. The P devices only need the basic MPLS
forwarding capability and do not maintain information about a VPN.
P2P See point to point service
packet loss The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannot
accept any incoming data at a given moment.
packet over SDH/ A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS
SONET interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of
packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
Packet rate The number of bits or bytes passed within a specified time. It is expressed in bits/s or
bytes/s.
packet switching A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchanging
packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections.
parity A method for character level error detection. An extra bit added to a string of bits, usually
a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or even
parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the transmitting
device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and attaches the
appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error, may ask
for the data to be retransmitted.
pass-through The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given
direction of transmission.
path layer A layer within an SDH entity that supports the SDH based network transport services,
e.g. multiplexing, cross-connection, regeneration. The network element function is
modeled by managed objects.
PBS See peak burst size
PCB See printed circuit board
PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit
for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.
PCR See peak cell rate
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDU See protocol data unit
PE See provider edge

peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak cell rate The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells.
peak information rate Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be
not less than the committed information rate.
Peer BGP speakers exchanging information with each other.
penultimate hop Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS
popping enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged
packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an
adjacent Label Edge Router (LER).
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-
min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history
performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES
register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so
every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is
used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so
as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
permanent virtual path Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
PGND protection ground
phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of
a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
PHB See per-hop behavior
PHP See penultimate hop popping
physical layer Physical layer is the Layer 1 in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) architecture; the
layer that provides services to transmit bits or groups of bits over a transmission link
between open systems and which entails electrical, mechanical and handshaking
physical link The physical link refers to the link between two physical NEs. When the user creates
NEs or refreshes the device status, the system automatically creates the physical link
according to the topology structure information on the device. The physical link can
modify the remarks information. It cannot be deleted.
Ping Test A test that is performed to send a data packet to the target IP address (a unique IP address
on the device on the network) to check whether the target host exists according to the
data packet of the same size returned from the target host.
PIR See peak information rate

plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
hierarchy rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
PLL See phase-locked loop
PLR See point of local repair
point of local repair The ingress node of the bypass tunnel. The head-end node of a backup tunnel or a detour
tunnel.
point to multipoint A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations
(from one to many).
point to point service A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
terminal users.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
policy template To define the calculation rules of a charging event, for example, rating, debiting and
accumulating. A policy template may contain the parameters to be instantiated. They
can be used when the attributes of the condition judgment, calculation method, and action
functions are carried out.
port forwarding Forwarding of interface-based TCP application data through SSL-encrypted tunnels.
Port priority The priority used when a port attaches tags to Layer 2 packets. Packets received on ports
with higher priorities are forwarded preferentially.
POS See packet over SDH/SONET
power up To start up a computer; to begin a cold boot procedure; to turn on the power
PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol
PPS See pulse per second
PQ See priority queue
PQ See priority queuing
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC primary reference clock
Precision Time Precision clock synchronization protocol for networked measurement and control
Protocol systems, the 1588 standard stipulated by IEEE.
Preemption During the process of establishing CR-LSP, if you cannot fine one path that satisfies
requirements, you can remove another established path and take up its bandwidth
resource. That is called preemption. CR-LSP check whether the path can be preempted
according to two priority features, that is, Setup Priority and Holding Priority.
Preemption is activated by the Resv message of RSVP-TE. Only when the priority of
Path1, which you want to set up, is higher than that of Path2, you can preempt the
bandwidth source of Path2 for Path1.
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.

priority queue A priority queue is an abstract data type in computer programming that supports the
following three operations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an
associated priority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest
priority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3)
PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it
priority queuing The Priority Queuing (PQ) is a queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority.
According to the PQ algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater
bandwidth, lower latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent
till all packets of higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher priorities
are handled earlier than others.
protection channels The channels allocated to transport the working traffic during a switch event. When there
is a switch event, traffic on the affected working channels is bridged onto on the
protection channels.
protection ground bar A bar connecting the PGND cable of the cabinet so that the cabinet and the earth are in
the same equipotential level.
protection ground A cable which connects the equipment and the protection ground bar. Usually, one half
cable of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol data unit It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.
provider edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and
exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a
PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and
the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes
edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched
Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
PSTN See public switched telephone network
PTMP See point to multipoint
PTN packet transport network
PTP See Precision Time Protocol
public switched A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public
telephone network subscribers. Sometimes called POTS.
pulse per second Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This is
because 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does not
provide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as the
reference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be used
on other interfaces for high precision timing.

PVP See permanent virtual path

PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag
of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.
The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the
carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS See quality of service
quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R99 Release 1999

radio access network The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the CN
from wireless network.
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of
controller the radio resources.
RAN See radio access network
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
Protocol convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
rated current The input current of the equipment as declared by the manufacturer.
RDI See remote defect indication
Re-optimization Re-optimization refers to the dynamic optimization of CR-LSPs, namely, the periodic
calculation of CR-LSP routes. If the recalculated route is better than the current route, a
new CR-LSP is created. Traffic switches from the original CR-LSP to the new CR-LSP,
and then the original CR-LSP is deleted.
Real Time Protocol Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is a host-to-host protocol. It is used to deliver real-
time services such as audio and video over the IP network.

real time variable bit The rt-VBR is intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP
rate (VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR),
sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source
device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
Real-time Transport A type of host-to-host protocol used in real-time multimedia services such as Voice over
Protocol IP (VoIP) and video.
reboot To start the system again. Programs or data will be reloaded to all boards.
RED See random early detection
reference clock A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks
for reference.
REI See remote error indication
remote defect A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal
indication detects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are
two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream
LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is
sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.
remote maintenance For the other devices in the same MA, their MEPs are called the Remote Maintenance
association end point association End Points (RMEPs).
remote monitor A widely used network management standard defined by the IETF, and it enhances the
MIB II standard greatly. It mainly functions to monitor the data traffic over a network
segment or the entire network. RMON is completely based on the SNMP architecture,
including the NMS and the Agent running on each network device.
Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.
required Min Rx The minimum interval between received BFD control packets that the local system is
interval capable of supporting.
Resource Reservation The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
Protocol used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP performs on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end
transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end
to slow down the transmission rate.
RF See radio frequency
RFC See Request For Comments
ring network A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes,
forming a circular pathway for signals.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMEP See remote maintenance association end point

RMON See remote monitor

RMRI See required Min Rx interval
RNC See radio network controller
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
rollback A return to a previous condition through cancelation of a certain operation.
Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level
alarms always accompany a root alarm.
Route restriction The constraint conditions for calculating a route. When creating a trail, the user can
specify the explicit route and the NEs that the trail cannot pass. The explicit route and
the NEs are the constraints for calculating the route. The inevitable trail only functions
when the number of routes is calculated as 1. Double-click the NE icon can set the NE
as an NE that cannot be passed, and double-clicking it again can cancel the setting.
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
Protocol based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
routing policy Routing policies are implemented to filter routing information, mainly through the
change of route properties.
routing protocol A formula used by routers to determine the appropriate path onto which data should be
forwarded.
routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers
regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the
destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in
hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.
Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can
communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the
transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital
interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others
are the same as RS232.
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol
rt-VBR See real time variable bit rate
RTP See Real-time Transport Protocol
RTP See Real Time Protocol
S
S-VLAN service VLAN

S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference
source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization
of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NE
will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection
switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality
information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to
transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the
multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality
grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be
implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.
SC See square connector
SCR sustainable cell rate
SD See signal degrade
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy
SDP serious disturbance period
security alarm A message generated when a security-related event that is defined by security policy as
being an alarm condition has been detected. A security alarm is intended to come to the
attention of appropriate entities in a timely manner.
security level The classification of the security according to its significance.
security log Security logs record the security operations on the NMS, such as logging in to the server,
modifying the password, and exiting from the NMS server.
SEMF See synchronous equipment management function
sequence number An identifying number used to designate a block of data, an operation, or part of an
operation.
service data The user and/or network information required for the normal functioning of service.
SETS See synchronous equipment timing source
Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the
resources required by other backup tunnels.
SFP See small form-factor pluggable
shaping The process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to certain
defined traffic profile.
SHDSL See single-line high speed digital subscriber line
shortest path first Link-state, is a hierarchical IGP routing algorithm proposed as a successor to RIP in the
Internet community. OSPF features include least-cost routing, multipath routing, and
load balancing. OSPF was derived from an early version of the IS-IS protocol. See IS-
IS.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal degrade A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect
(e.g., dDEG) condition is active.

signaling stream Control stream that controls calls and bearer.

Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Simple Traffic Simple traffic classification (STC) organizes data packets into multiple priorities or
Classification multiple service classes. A network administrator can set STC policies. An STC policy
can include the IP precedence or the DSCP value of an IP packet, the EXP value of an
MPLS packet, the ToS field in the IP packet header or the 802.1p value of a VLAN
packet.
single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end of
the protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectional
failure.
single-line high speed A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and
digital subscriber line HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user
terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse
amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide
the broadband access service.
Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.
small form-factor A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
pluggable
SMB sub-miniature B
Smooth upgrade Process of upgrading the system files without service interruption
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SONET See synchronous optical network
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SPE See superstratum provider edge
SPF See shortest path first
SQN See sequence number
square connector Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style".
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
SSMB synchronization status message byte
static ARP A protocol that binds some IP addresses to a specified gateway. The packet of these IP
addresses must be forwarded through this gateway.

static route A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configure
it manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normal
state if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensure
bandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network is
faulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It must
be changed by the operators.
static routing table A static routing table is constructed manually by the system administrator using the route
command.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
super long packet The packet that has a length of more than 1,600 bytes.
super short packet The packet that has a length of less than 64 bytes.
superstratum provider The SPE devices are core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network.
edge The UPE devices that are connected to the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices.
The PWs set up between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs of the
SPE devices. The SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the sites on UPE
side and those of the UPE interfaces that are connected to the SPE. SPE is sometimes
called NPE.
Switching restoration It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when the
time line is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSP
sub-network.
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
Synchronize Alarm When synchronizing the alarms, the network management system checks the alarms in
the network management system database and the alarms in the NE. If they are
inconsistent, the alarms in the NE are uploaded to the network management system
database and overwrite the old ones.
synchronize NE time To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so as
to synchronize all NEs with the server.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
hierarchy transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is
suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since
it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronous The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into
equipment object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
management function
synchronous The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts of
equipment timing multiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock.
source
synchronous optical A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to
network connect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data
types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiples
of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).
Synchronous source A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would include
clocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813.
SYSLOG Syslog is an industry standard protocol for recording device logs.
Syslog Service Syslog service is used to manage the device to send the log information to the host. It is
used on the sending-information port.
system logging System log tracks miscellaneous system events like startup, shutdown and events like
hardware and controller failures.
T
Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
tangent rings It is a concept in geometry. There is a public node between two ring networks. The public
node often brings in single-point failure.
TCH See traffic channel
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol
TCP/IP See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDD See time division duplex
TDM See time division multiplexing
TE See traffic engineering
Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.
threshold-crossing A performance monitoring parameter reaches or exceeds a preset threshold.
throughput The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection,
service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with bandwidth.
TIM trace identifier mismatch
time division duplex In Time Division Duplex (TDD) system, the uplink and downlink links use different
timeslots. They usually share the same frequency.

time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
multiplexing (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time
slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted
over one channel.
Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able
to interconnect.
time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
timing loop A network condition where a slave clock providing synchronization becomes locked to
its own timing signal. It is generally created when the slave clock timing information is
looped back to its own input, either directly or via other network equipment. Timing
loops should be prevented in networks by careful network design.
TM See traffic management
TM See topology management
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
token bucket algorithm The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is limited, and
the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token bucket
polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to the preset
rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in. Packets can
be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be transferred till there
are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of packet input.
token ring The IEEE 802.5 standard for a token-passing ring network with a star-configured
physical topology. Internally, signals travel around the network from one station to the
next in a ring. Physically, each station connects to a central hub called a multistation
access server.
tolerance Permissible degree of variation from a pre-set standard.
topology management Topology management displays static configuration objects on a graphic interface, as
well as the status data, monitoring data, and alarm data on the objects. It also enables
users to perform operations on the GUI. The topology management is integrated with
the EAM, fault, and security NBI common service subsystems to provide the domain-
based element management solution.
Topology Object A basic element in the NMS topology view, which includes submap, node, connection,
and so on.
Topology view A basic component for the human-machine interface. The topology view directly
displays the networking of a network as well as the alarm and communication statuses
of each network element and subnet. In this manner, the topology view reflects the basic
running conditions of the network.
ToS See type of service
ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
TPS See tributary protection switch

TPS protection The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect N
tributary boards. When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switching
command, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over to
the specified protection board and the protection board takes over the job of the working
board. After the fault is cleared, the service is automatically switched to the original
board
TR See token ring
traffic channel Indicates the channel that carries voice coding information or user data. Traffic channels
are classified into voice traffic channels and data traffic channels.
traffic classification Traffic classification enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different
priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified quality of service
(QoS) in the entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated
differently.
traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
Traffic frame discard It is the traffic frame discard control. Two options are provided: enable and disable. It
flag indicates the means by which the NE discards cells when the network is congested. When
the frame discard mark is closed, the cells will be discarded at the cell level; when it is
opened, they will be discarded at the frame level. Here, "frame" refers to the AAL
protocol data unit.
traffic management Traffic management refers to the process of monitoring user traffic on a network and
redistributing/rerouting it when necessary in order to ensure optimal network
performance
traffic policy A full set of QoS policies formed by association of traffic classification and QoS actions.
trail termination source The trail termination source identifier (TTSI) of the LSP is used to uniquely identify an
identifier LSP on a network.
transit The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is
labeled. The middle node is named Transit.
transit delay The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when the
site finishes the data frame transmission or to the time when all data frames are received
by the receiver.
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
Transmission Control Common name for the suite of protocols developed to support the construction of
Protocol/Internet worldwide internetworks.
Protocol
transparent A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but
transmission encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.

transport plane The transport plane provides bidirectional or unidirectional transfer of user information,
from one location to another. It can also provide transfer of some control and network
management information. The transport plane is layered; it is equivalent to the transport
network defined in ITU-T Rec. G.805.
tributary protection Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to
switch protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
tributary unit group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-
n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that
mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed
to increase flexibility of the transport network
trTCM See two rate three color marker
trunk cable The main (often large diameter) cable of a coaxial cable system.
trunk line A transmission channel between two switching centers or nodes. It is used to connect
the exchange to the network.
TTL See time to live
TTSI See trail termination source identifier
TU tributary unit
TUG See tributary unit group
Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
twisted pair It is a four-pair wire medium-composed of pairs of wires - used in a variety of networks.
two rate three color The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak
marker Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated
burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the
PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or
doesn't exceed the CIR.
type of service A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) used for quality of service (QoS). The TOS field
has 8 bits in length, which is divided into five subfields.
U
U-VLAN A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.
Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS unavailable second
UAT See unavailable time event
UBR See unspecified bit rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP See User Datagram Protocol

unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The
event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than 10-3 within 10 consecutive
seconds.
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See user network interface
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unspecified bit rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal
for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,
and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.
UPC/NPC See usage parameter control/network parameter control
Upper subrack The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.
Upper threshold The critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded.
UPS uninterruptible power supply
usage parameter Usage Parameter Control/Network Parameter Control. During the communication, the
control/network UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual circuit that is input to
parameter control the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures will be taken to control.
NPC is similar to the UPC in function. The difference is that the incoming traffic
monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their positions. The UPC
locates at the user/network interface, while the NPC at the network interface.
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
Protocol datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
User operation log Record the operation of the user for the convenience of analysis and query.
V-NNI See virtual network-network interface

V-UNI See virtual user-network interface
variable bit rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR See variable bit rate
VC See virtual channel
VCC See virtual channel connection
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification

VCI See virtual channel identifier

VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board
virtual channel Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in the
ATM network uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channel
identifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted by the
switching.
virtual channel The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
connection logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.
virtual channel A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to
identifier identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on
its way to its destination.
virtual circuit A channel or circuit established between two points on an ATM /a network. Virtual
circuits can be Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs) or Switched Virtual Circuits (SVCs).
virtual leased line A point-to-point, layer-2 channel that behaves like a leased line by transparently
transporting different protocols with a guaranteed throughput.
virtual local area A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
virtual network- A virtual network-network interface (V-NNI) is a network-side interface.
network interface
virtual path A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM
network based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which
VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
service enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
virtual private wire A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,
service Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual
routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,
performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on
the device.
virtual switch instance An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the
virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge
function and can terminate PW.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface classification and traffic control in HQoS.
VLAN See virtual local area network

VLAN ID Namely, it is the virtual LAN identifier. One Ethernet port can support 4K VLAN routes,
and one NE can support up to 8K VLAN routes.
VLAN mapping A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by
translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the
destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into
private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the
destination.
VLAN mapping table One of the properties of the MST region, which describes the relationship between
VLANs and spanning tree instances.
VLL See virtual leased line
voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP See voice over IP
VP See virtual path
VPI See virtual path identifier
VPLS See virtual private LAN service
VPN See virtual private network
VPWS See virtual private wire service
VRF See virtual route forward
VSI See virtual switch instance
W
WAN See wide area network
Wander The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their ideal
position in time (where long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less than
10Hz).
wavelength The distance between successive peaks or troughs in a periodic signal that is propagated
through space. Wavelength is symbolized by the Greek letter lambda and can be
calculated as speed divided by frequency.
wavelength division A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of
multiplexing single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple
channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
WDM See wavelength division multiplexing
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.

weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
WFQ See weighted fair queuing
wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.
WRED See weighted random early detection
error packets The packets with received messages not translated or translated incorrectly.
X
X digital subscriber line A family of bandwidth-efficient modulation techniques, developed to achieve extremely
high data transfer rates over twisted- pair cables. While the letter "X" represents a
variable, DSL stands for "Digital Subscriber Line". XDSL techniques may offer several
benefits such as, capability to offer high-speed data services to customers, low cost by
using existing infrastructure and switching congestion relief caused by existing data
users.
xDSL See X digital subscriber line


OptiX PTN 910 V100R003C02 Hardware Description 05 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OptiX PTN 910 V100R003C02 Hardware Description 05 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX PTN 910 V100R003C02

Huawei iManager U2000 V100R006C02

This document is intended for:

l Network planning engineers

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Calls attention to important information, best practices and

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Changes in Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C02

Known defects are fixed.

Changes in Issue 04 (2013-01-18) Based on Product Version V100R003C02

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Known defects are fixed.

Changes in Issue 03 (2012-09-21) Based on Product Version V100R003C02

Known defects are fixed.

Changes in Issue 02 (2012-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C02

Known defects are fixed.

Changes in Issue 01 (2012-03-15) Based on Product Version V100R003C02

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

2.5.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................59

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

2.10.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................103

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

2.15.6 Board Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................................143

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

3.1 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................................167

4 Pluggable Optical Modules.....................................................................................................168

5 Pluggable Electrical Module................................................................................................... 172

7 ETP4830-4815AF External AC Power Supply System.........................................................182

8 Fibers and Cables...................................................................................................................... 192

A Safety Labels............................................................................................................................. 223

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

The OptiX PTN 910 is case-shaped for easy deployment.

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX PTN 910

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Figure 1-2 Slot allocation of the OptiX PTN 910

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

About This Chapter

2.1 Overview of Boards

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4

Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5

2.1 Overview of Boards

Board Description and Valid Slots

Board Name Board Description Valid Slot

CXPA System control, switching Slot 1 and slot 2

CXPB System control, switching Slot 1 and slot 2

CXPG System control, switching Slot 1 and slot 2

CXPH System control, switching Slot 1 and slot 2

TNC1CXPI System control, switching Slot 1 and slot 2